hummy.tv Wiki - User contributions [en]

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2022-08-29T11:51:24Z

Black Hole: /* Sidecar */

'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}

Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]

==7Zip==

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.

==Android-Remote==
[[File:h-rem1.png|100px|thumb|right]]
[[File:h-rem2.png|100px|thumb|right]]

This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video
recorder and also the Foxsat, requirements are :-

*[https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Custom_Firmware_Overview '''Custom FirmWare'''] installed
*The [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/WebIf_Remote_Controller '''IR Package'''] Installed
*The [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Android App '''] installed on your phone / tablet
*Connection to the same home network as the phone / tablet.

Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs, the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size and the Foxsat

The Android App. is available [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Click Here''']

==Arbookmarks==

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

==At==

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']

==Auto Schedule Restore==

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

'''NOTES:-'''
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-
*Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.

==Badnts==

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
'''Notes'''
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed

==Bash==

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']] Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

==Blocklist==

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].

==Bookmark==

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed

==BootHDR==

<big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') 

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]

==Boot_Settings==

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]

==Bsed==

Binary-safe search/replace utility.

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==cfupdater==

A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.

Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-

<pre>
/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>
</pre>

If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then
<pre> tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log
</pre>

==Channeldel==

Note: now superseded by tunefix

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later

==ChaseDecrypt==

Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget

See [[ChaseDecrypt]] for further details

==Chaseget==

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==CLI==

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#

==Content Sharing==

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content

==Crashdiag==

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it

==Crash Log==

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
</pre>

==Cron==

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

<pre>
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

</pre>

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run
#at 2AM every day
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
#every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

 crontab -l 

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line

==Cryptokey==

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-

<pre>
humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>
</pre>

The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax

==Curl Command==

curl command line utility.

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==DB Update==

General boot-time database update utility

==Dedup (Command Line)==
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Dedup (Series Helper File)==

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

<pre>
Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
</pre>

The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']

==DeRMA==

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message

==Detectads==

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package

==Disable DSO==

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

==Disable OTA==

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax

'''Note''' The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation

==Display==

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

 /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' 

The display can be blanked with :-

 /sbin/display ' ' 

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

 /sbin/display '$he:lp' 

'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

==DLNA-Filter==

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

'''NOTES'''
*DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank

==DLNA-Servername==

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed

==Dropbear SSH==

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys

==Dropbear SFTP==

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']

==DUMA==

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.

==Dustbin==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Undelete | '''Undelete''']]

==Dvbsnoop==

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.

==E2fs_Progs==

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].

==[Eject]==
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-

*USB interface name
*USB Device name
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
*Device % used
*Device capacity
*Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

'''NOTES'''
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

==EPG==

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

When using the ''epg'' command on HD-FOX, note that:
# There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
# To access the cache, use ''epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata''.

==Epgfix==

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).

You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Epgpatch==

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview

==Enable Telnet==

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

<pre>
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
</pre>

==Exfat==

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT

==Exfat Builder==

'''See Exfat above'''

[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.

==EXTRA.css==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]

==Fan==

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

'''Notes'''

*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run

<pre>
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
</pre>

==Ffmpeg==

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3

Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']

==Fix-disk==

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]

==Fix-disk (USB)==

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].

==Fix Flash Packages ==

If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

'''NOTES'''
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==Flatview==

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

'''NOTES'''

*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

'''Exceptions'''

*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

==Flexget==

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

 */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron 

* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']

==Flexview==

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]

==Forcedate==

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].

==Foscam==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
* login = humaxftp
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==Foxlink==

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]

==Fuse==

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.

==Genre Icons==

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]

==Git==

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.

==Grep==

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

<pre>
humax# cat original-file.txt

-H Add 'filename:' prefix
-h Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-q Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v Select non-matching lines
-s Suppress open and read errors
-r Recurse
-i Ignore case
-w Match whole words only
-F PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N Match up to N times per file
-A N Print N lines of trailing context
-B N Print N lines of leading context
-C N Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-v Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#
</pre>

==Gnu Fdisk==

GNU fdisk.

==Hdparm==

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.

==HMT==

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

'''hmt Options List'''
<pre>
humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
Commands:
+/-new Mark/unmark recording as new.
+/-lock Mark/unmark recording as locked.
+/-guidance Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
+/-protect Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
+/-encrypted Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
+/-shrunk Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
+/-dedup Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
+/-detectads Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
-p Display parseable file information (see *).
-list Display file information (default).
-bookmarks Display bookmarks.
+addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+clearbookmarks
+settitle=<new title>
+setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
+setguidance=<new guidance>
+setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
+setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
+setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
+setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
+patch8=offset:value patch 8-bit value
+patch16=offset:value patch 16-bit value
+patch32=offset:value patch 32-bit value
Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
+read8=offset read 8-bit value
+read16=offset read 16-bit value
+read32=offset read 32-bit value
Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
Resume point, Status/Reason.

</pre>

'''Notes'''
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

==hmt-linux==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)

==hmt-solaris==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)

==Hrwconv==

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

==HTTPS==

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On

==Humaxrw==

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.

<pre>
humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
-d <list> delete recordings
-g <list> get recordings to current directory
-h help (this text)
-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
-u <list> unprotect recordings
-v version
-x extended listing for humaxdiag
-w pause at the end waiting for a keypress
-y answer yes to all prompts

Advanced Options
-D Delete time shift recording buffers
-E Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
-H <list> get hre files for recordings
-M <n> modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
-O <n> offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
-V <n> modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
-Z Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from source Humax disk
and copy to destination Humax disk
-g <list> get recordings from source disk
and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-n no info - use if corruption is really bad
-g <list> get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
<pre>
humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
-C Skip checksum validation.
-c <arguments> Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
-d<level> Enable debugging at level.
-l Show contents of HDF file (default).
-o Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
-r Don't compress blocks when creating.
-S<section> Extract only the numbered section.
-t Test archive (validate checksums).
-x Extract files.
-s Also show/extract member checksums.

Examples:

View HDF: humidify file.hdf
Test HDF: humidify -t file.hdf
Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
Create HDF: humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)

</pre>

A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
It contains the following files:-

[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]

==Hwctl==

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !

==Id3v2==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].

Available commands:

<pre>
-h, --help Display this help and exit
-f, --list-frames Display all possible frames for id3v2
-L, --list-genres Lists all id3v1 genres
-v, --version Display version information and exit
-l, --list Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
-R, --list-rfc822 Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
-d, --delete-v2 Deletes id3v2 tags
-s, --delete-v1 Deletes id3v1 tags
-D, --delete-all Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
-C, --convert Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
-1, --id3v1-only Writes only id3v1 tag
-2, --id3v2-only Writes only id3v2 tag
-a, --artist "ARTIST" Set the artist information
-A, --album "ALBUM" Set the album title information
-t, --song "SONG" Set the song title information
-c, --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
Set the comment information (both
description and language optional)
-g, --genre num Set the genre number
-y, --year num Set the year
-T, --track num/num Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
</pre>

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

==In Use==

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].

==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.

==Jpnevulator==

Serial Port Sniffer.

==Joe==

Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].

==Kernels==

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support

==Lighttpd==

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/ '''HERE''']

==LDD==

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line

==Libpcre==

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library

==Libunwind==

Utility used with the Crashdiag package

==LibParted==

Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package

==Libsndfile==

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.

==Loaders==

{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}

The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']

==M4==

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']

==Maintenance Mode==

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]

==Mediatomb==
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']

==Mongoose==

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.

==Multienv==

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.

==Multi-mode==

[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]

==Mvdisks==

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

'''Notes'''

#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
''' DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. '''

To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
#reboot the Humax
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder

==Nano==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==New Portal==

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]

==Newk==

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package

==Nicesplice==

A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]

==Nsplice==

Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==NTFS Progs==

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS

==Ntp Client==

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']

==Nugget==

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

<pre>
nugget <command>
ping - Test nugget connectivity.
status - Show nugget status and version.
schedule.load - Load recording schedule from disk.
schedule.save - Save recording schedule to disk.
schedule.slot - Update timers for schedule slot.
schedule.db - sqlite3 database handle info.
schedule.epg - Display EPG information for slot.
schedule.timers - Show internal timers.
cryptokey - Set or display encryption key.
</pre>

==OPKG==

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg download auto-unprotect HID= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

 opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

 opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants

==Opkg-beta==

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen

==Parted==

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]

==Popol==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]

<pre>

-s, --songname set songname
-a, --artist set artist
-l, --album set album
-c, --comment set comment
-y, --year set release year
-t, --tracknum set track number

</pre>

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Portal Xtra1==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Poweron-Channel==

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings

*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None

*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)

'''NOTES'''
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
<pre>
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1

</pre>

==Procps==

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Python==

A package that adds the Python programming language

==Python Setuptools==

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]

==Qtube==

Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Youtube-dl | '''Youtube-dl''']]

==Recmon==

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.

Examples
<pre>
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
</pre>

==Rc app bridge==

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

'''Notes'''
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled

==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option

==Redring ==

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

{| border="1"
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
! width="250"| Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
! 11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
! Scrolling On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Clock
! Clock Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Blue Brightness

Red Brightness
! Fixed
100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable

Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%

0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Amber Brightness
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11%
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

 HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

'''Notes'''

*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

==Renumber==
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

'''Notes'''

*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package

==Reset Webif==

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==

Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Mobile==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==rs==

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

Options:
-d[level] Set debug level.
-D<seconds> Sleep for random(seconds).
-h Show help text.
-i Show detected machine info.
-q Be more quiet.

Commands:
register <email> Register this device.
push Push scheduled events.
cmd Retrieve next queued command.
ack <id> Acknowledge command <id>.
status Show device registration status.
log <msg> Send log message to server.
epg Distributed EPG management.

</pre>

==rs time==

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time

==RMA==

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

'''Notes'''
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page

==Rsvsync==

Boot-time reservation sync service

==Rsync==

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

 rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup 

This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ 

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ 

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ 

[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html '''More Info.''']

==rt3070==

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware

==Safe Mode==

Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the [[Firmware_Downloads | '''Firmware Download page''']]

'''Note''' if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.

==Samba==

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

'''Tips'''

#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

==Schedchk==

Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG

See the [[Schedchk|user guide]] for further details

==Scons==

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software

==Screensaver==

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-

{| border="1"
|-
!3X5
>>>
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
!Neon
>>>
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
!Avatar
>>>
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]
|-
! 7Seg
>>>
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
! Neon-Blue
>>>
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
!Wedge
>>>
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
|-
! Dot
>>>
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
! Agen
>>>
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
!Cursor
>>>
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
|-
! VFD
>>>
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
! Glass-Blue
>>>
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
!Maze
>>>
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
|}

'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server

''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

<pre>
humax# screensaver
1: 3X5
2: 7Seg
3: Black
4: Cursor
5: Humax Default
6: Neon
7: Neon-Blue
8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
'''NOTES:-'''
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default

==Sed==

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']

==Series Filer==

'''NOTE'''

'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

'''NOTE:-'''

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==Sh (SHell)==

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language

==Sidecar==

''Web-If >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files''

Recreates "sidecar" files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

The sidecar files are normally created at the time the recording is made, and are essential for HDR-FOX/HD-FOX to provide the full range of transport control (including bookmarks), or access subtitles, surround sound, etc. Without sidecars, a .ts will play (with limited controls) provided it is not encrypted. A recorded .ts file might be stripped of its sidecars if the user was not aware of their importance and only transferred the .ts. Files imported from elsewhere (e.g. created by a video editor or converted from an MP4 download) do not have the relevant sidecar files in the first place.

Other media formats (e.g .mp4) will play, also with limited controls and no surround sound or subtitles, but cannot have sidecars. Converting them to .ts (M2TS) permits the addition of sidecars, which regains extensive transport control and the possibility of subtitles, surround sound, etc.

Command line options (as displayed by command line help, see Note 2):-
<pre>
humax#sidecar
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

-n : Create new .nts file
-h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
-x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
-c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
-t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
-p : Display progress bar
-i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.

humax#
</pre>

'''NOTES'''
# The Sidecar package is not installed by default and can be installed by the user using the ''Web-If >> Package Management >> Available'' screen. The "Sidecar Files" option is only available on the OPT+ menu (for .ts recordings) if the package has been installed. The option is greyed out if the file is an unsuitable candidate (e.g. is not a .ts, or has not been decrypted).
# If provided with no command options, Sidecar displays the help and exits.
# Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application, may not be compatible. In particular, the file '''''must''''' be in "M2TS" format (192-byte headers, instead of 188-byte as standard for TS) even though it has the .ts extension. Conversion can be achieved using ''ffmpeg'':
#: <code>ffmpeg -i <input file> <output file>.m2ts</code> (then rename the output file to .ts)
# There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''Here''']].
# Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings.
# Sidecar cannot process encrypted files (as per original recordings). If the .ts file has not been decrypted since it was recorded, but has lost its .hmt file, the OPT+ option is available and Sidecar can create dummy hmt and nts files which are sufficient to allow the file to be decrypted, i.e.:-
#* Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files;
#* Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If;
#* When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
#* There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files.
:: Alternatively, recordings missing the original .hmt file can be decrypted using the Stripts utility.

==Smartmontools==

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A 

or

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
<pre>

humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME FLAG VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE UPDATED WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate 0x000f 114 099 006 Pre-fail Always - 66811863
3 Spin_Up_Time 0x0003 097 097 000 Pre-fail Always - 0
4 Start_Stop_Count 0x0032 098 098 020 Old_age Always - 2878
5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct 0x0033 100 100 036 Pre-fail Always - 0
7 Seek_Error_Rate 0x000f 078 060 030 Pre-fail Always - 70502101
9 Power_On_Hours 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3294
10 Spin_Retry_Count 0x0013 100 100 097 Pre-fail Always - 0
12 Power_Cycle_Count 0x0032 099 099 020 Old_age Always - 1439
184 End-to-End_Error 0x0032 100 100 099 Old_age Always - 0
187 Reported_Uncorrect 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3
188 Command_Timeout 0x0032 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
189 High_Fly_Writes 0x003a 093 093 000 Old_age Always - 7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022 055 044 045 Old_age Always In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius 0x0022 045 056 000 Old_age Always - 45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered 0x001a 048 039 000 Old_age Always - 66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector 0x0012 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable 0x0010 100 100 000 Old_age Offline - 0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count 0x003e 200 200 000 Old_age Always - 0
</pre>

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda

==SQLite3==

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)

==SRT==

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

'''Notes'''

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/ '''HERE''']

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail

==Status==

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
</pre>
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen

==Strace==

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.

==Stripts==
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

<pre>
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
-a Analyse an input file.
-A Quickly analyse an input file.
-c Check if there are any EIT packets.
-C Show address of first EIT packet.
-D Dump NTS file.
-E Check if file is encrypted.
-f Also fix PAT packets.
-F Only fix PAT packets.
-T Dump TS file.
-v Verbose.
-X Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
-Z Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
-z Analyse entire TS file.
-@ <key> Decrypt recording with <key>.
-/ <key> Check encryption key against recording. (* See NOTE Below)
-d [level] Increase debug level or set debug level.

* NOTE :- This option has been reported to return "Incorrect" when using the correct key in the Windows version
</pre>

 stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

 stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

 stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

 stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

'''NOTE'''
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

<pre>
stripts -@@ <input> <output>

stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"
</pre>

1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key, (When the process is run on the original Humax recorder)

2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a different Humax unit (or on a computer), the original unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630 (adding a '3' before each digit from the serial number)

Here is a key compiled from the info. on the Humax label (Bottom panel) :-

[[File:Humax-Key.png|300px|thumb|left]]

"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)

There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities '''See Link HERE''']

==Swapper==

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

==Sweeper==

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

'''Command Line operation'''

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor

Example 1)

 action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

 action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

 lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

 action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

 action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

 folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

 folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-
*lines starting with '#' are comments
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

<pre>
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
</pre>

==Subtitles==
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]

==Swifi==

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi

==Sysmon==
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

*Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

*CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

*Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic

==System Flush==

The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.

The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.

==TCL Check==

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files

==Tcpfix==

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses

==TCP Ping==

Simple TCP ping utility.

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See ''' RED ''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al 

<pre>
C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>
</pre>

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*''' [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' '''
*''' [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf '''
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details

==Telnet Commands==

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
* cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
* cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
* pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
* ls -al = list contents of the current directory
* touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory

==Tempmon==

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C

==Text Editors==

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]

==Tmenu==

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
<pre>
Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

/-------------------------\
| T E L N E T M E N U |
\-------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
2 - Remove web interface password.
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
x - Exit and close connection.
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option:

</pre>

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings

==Tnftp==

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

 transmission-remote 

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
*When highlighted select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

===Blocklist===

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

'''Notes'''
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.

==Transportx==

This package enhances the transport function of the Humax after installing (and a system re-boot), the pause button gains a new function, after the initial pause further presses of this button will step the paused image forward by a single frame (approx. 1/25 second), press play to resume normal viewing

After the SLOW button is pressed, the following functions are also available :-

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/4 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/8 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/16 fwd

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Rew button: x1 rew
*Rew button: x1/2 rew *
*Rew button: x1/4 rew
*Rew button: x1/8 rew *

Press play to exit

* It has been reported that these options may not be available

==Trm==

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==TSTools==

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]

==TTYSnoop==

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.

==Tunefix==
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN

'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

==Tunefix Update==

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.

==TV Diary==

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]

==Uinput==

User-space input kernel module

==Unencrypt==

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
* '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' 

*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
<pre>
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
</pre>

*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

*Dustbin Name
*Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

==Version==

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
<pre>
humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
Web interface version: 1.2.1
Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#
</pre>

==Vfdtest==
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

 vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

 vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off

==Vi==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).

==Vim Basic==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Vim Standard==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''

==Virtual-Disk2==

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Backup/Restore Schedule===
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

NOTE : An auto-schedule-restore backup, is a seperate file held in /mod/boot/schedule.ab

===Change Channel===

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

===Change Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Create Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Delete===

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on

===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Detect Adverts===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

===Disable AR===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Enable Auto-Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

===Enable Auto-Dedup===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])

===Enable Auto-Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])

===Enable Auto Expire===
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first

===Bookmarks===
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

===Enable Auto-MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
===Enable Auto-Shrink===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])

===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" 

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

===Extract To MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
*The equivalent command line would be:-
<pre>
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>
</pre>

===Enable Auto-mpg===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

===File Editor===

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

===Lock===

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

===Mark as Watched===

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

===Manual Event===
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
*Create : Recording or Reminder
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
*Channel : Number / Name
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

===Multi Mode Recording===

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]

===Network Settings===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
'''Notes'''
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

===New Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]

===Play===

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

===Rename (File)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

*New Filename
*New Medialist Title
*New Synopsis
*New Guidance Text
*New Genre

===Rename (Folder)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

===Reset New Flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

===Save Last Streamed Content===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

===Set Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

'''Notes'''
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

===Sidecar Files===

see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]

===Split===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

===Shrink (stripts)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

===Sweeper Rules===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

===Toggle no-sweep flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

===View Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture

==Web-IF Channel Icons==

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels

==Webif-Charts==

Chart modules for the web interface

==Webif-iphone==

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==Webif Style Sheet==

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
<pre>
img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
</pre>

Change the size of the pie chart:-

<pre>
#tbdiskpie
{
width: 100px;
height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
top: 7px !important;
}
</pre>

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
<pre>
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
</pre>

Change font colour or size :-
<pre>
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
</pre>

Change Icon size
<pre>
img.button { height: 50px; }
</pre>

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

<pre>
#toTop, #toTopHover
{
background: transparent !important;
display: none !important;
opacity: 100 !important;
}
</pre>

Remove EPG ENC icons

<pre>
img.epgenc { display: none; }
</pre>

==Webshell==

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access

==webm==

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
<pre>
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
</pre>

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

'''Notes:-'''
*There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
*Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported

When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-
<pre>
wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk
</pre>

The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail

==Wireless Helper==

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle

==WOL==

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
<pre>
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
</pre>
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
<pre>
echo /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
</pre>
NOTES:-
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by

==Xtra1 Portal==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]

==Youtube-dl==

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
</pre>

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code extension resolution note
249 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171 webm audio only DASH audio 6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140 m4a audio only DASH audio 145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278 webm 256x144 144p 34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242 webm 426x240 240p 44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160 mp4 256x144 144p 50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134 mp4 640x360 360p 74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243 webm 640x360 360p 78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133 mp4 426x240 240p 87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244 webm 854x480 480p 116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135 mp4 854x480 480p 117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136 mp4 1280x720 720p 191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247 webm 1280x720 720p 203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137 mp4 1920x1080 1080p 312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248 webm 1920x1080 1080p 357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271 webm 2560x1440 1440p 609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313 webm 3840x2160 2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17 3gp 176x144 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36 3gp 320x180 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43 webm 640x360 medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18 mp4 640x360 medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22 mp4 1280x720 hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
</pre>

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
</pre>

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
</pre>

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme '''Github Notes''']

A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-

[https://rg3.github.io/youtube-dl/supportedsites.html '''Available Sites''']

'''Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version'''

Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, STV, dplay

'''Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version'''

Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay

==Zeroconf==

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.

==Zip==

zip utilities for compressing files :-
<pre>
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
can include the special name - to compress standard input.
If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
-f freshen: only changed files -u update: only changed or new files
-d delete entries in zipfile -m move into zipfile (delete OS files)
-r recurse into directories -j junk (don't record) directory names
-0 store only -l convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
-1 compress faster -9 compress better
-q quiet operation -v verbose operation/print version info
-c add one-line comments -z add zipfile comment
-@ read names from stdin -o make zipfile as old as latest entry
-x exclude the following names -i include only the following names
-F fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D do not add directory entries
-A adjust self-extracting exe -J junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
-T test zipfile integrity -X eXclude eXtra file attributes
-y store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
-e encrypt -n don't compress these suffixes
</pre>

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2022-08-29T10:45:40Z

Black Hole: /* Sidecar */ Added information to the Notes and restructured.

'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}

Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]

==7Zip==

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.

==Android-Remote==
[[File:h-rem1.png|100px|thumb|right]]
[[File:h-rem2.png|100px|thumb|right]]

This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video
recorder and also the Foxsat, requirements are :-

*[https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Custom_Firmware_Overview '''Custom FirmWare'''] installed
*The [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/WebIf_Remote_Controller '''IR Package'''] Installed
*The [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Android App '''] installed on your phone / tablet
*Connection to the same home network as the phone / tablet.

Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs, the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size and the Foxsat

The Android App. is available [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Click Here''']

==Arbookmarks==

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

==At==

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']

==Auto Schedule Restore==

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

'''NOTES:-'''
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-
*Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.

==Badnts==

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
'''Notes'''
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed

==Bash==

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']] Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

==Blocklist==

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].

==Bookmark==

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed

==BootHDR==

<big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') 

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]

==Boot_Settings==

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]

==Bsed==

Binary-safe search/replace utility.

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==cfupdater==

A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.

Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-

<pre>
/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>
</pre>

If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then
<pre> tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log
</pre>

==Channeldel==

Note: now superseded by tunefix

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later

==ChaseDecrypt==

Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget

See [[ChaseDecrypt]] for further details

==Chaseget==

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==CLI==

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#

==Content Sharing==

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content

==Crashdiag==

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it

==Crash Log==

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
</pre>

==Cron==

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

<pre>
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

</pre>

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run
#at 2AM every day
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
#every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

 crontab -l 

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line

==Cryptokey==

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-

<pre>
humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>
</pre>

The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax

==Curl Command==

curl command line utility.

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==DB Update==

General boot-time database update utility

==Dedup (Command Line)==
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Dedup (Series Helper File)==

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

<pre>
Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
</pre>

The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']

==DeRMA==

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message

==Detectads==

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package

==Disable DSO==

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

==Disable OTA==

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax

'''Note''' The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation

==Display==

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

 /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' 

The display can be blanked with :-

 /sbin/display ' ' 

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

 /sbin/display '$he:lp' 

'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

==DLNA-Filter==

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

'''NOTES'''
*DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank

==DLNA-Servername==

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed

==Dropbear SSH==

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys

==Dropbear SFTP==

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']

==DUMA==

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.

==Dustbin==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Undelete | '''Undelete''']]

==Dvbsnoop==

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.

==E2fs_Progs==

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].

==[Eject]==
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-

*USB interface name
*USB Device name
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
*Device % used
*Device capacity
*Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

'''NOTES'''
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

==EPG==

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

When using the ''epg'' command on HD-FOX, note that:
# There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
# To access the cache, use ''epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata''.

==Epgfix==

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).

You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Epgpatch==

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview

==Enable Telnet==

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

<pre>
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
</pre>

==Exfat==

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT

==Exfat Builder==

'''See Exfat above'''

[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.

==EXTRA.css==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]

==Fan==

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

'''Notes'''

*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run

<pre>
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
</pre>

==Ffmpeg==

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3

Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']

==Fix-disk==

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]

==Fix-disk (USB)==

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].

==Fix Flash Packages ==

If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

'''NOTES'''
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==Flatview==

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

'''NOTES'''

*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

'''Exceptions'''

*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

==Flexget==

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

 */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron 

* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']

==Flexview==

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]

==Forcedate==

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].

==Foscam==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
* login = humaxftp
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==Foxlink==

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]

==Fuse==

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.

==Genre Icons==

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]

==Git==

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.

==Grep==

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

<pre>
humax# cat original-file.txt

-H Add 'filename:' prefix
-h Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-q Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v Select non-matching lines
-s Suppress open and read errors
-r Recurse
-i Ignore case
-w Match whole words only
-F PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N Match up to N times per file
-A N Print N lines of trailing context
-B N Print N lines of leading context
-C N Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-v Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#
</pre>

==Gnu Fdisk==

GNU fdisk.

==Hdparm==

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.

==HMT==

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

'''hmt Options List'''
<pre>
humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
Commands:
+/-new Mark/unmark recording as new.
+/-lock Mark/unmark recording as locked.
+/-guidance Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
+/-protect Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
+/-encrypted Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
+/-shrunk Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
+/-dedup Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
+/-detectads Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
-p Display parseable file information (see *).
-list Display file information (default).
-bookmarks Display bookmarks.
+addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+clearbookmarks
+settitle=<new title>
+setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
+setguidance=<new guidance>
+setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
+setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
+setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
+setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
+patch8=offset:value patch 8-bit value
+patch16=offset:value patch 16-bit value
+patch32=offset:value patch 32-bit value
Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
+read8=offset read 8-bit value
+read16=offset read 16-bit value
+read32=offset read 32-bit value
Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
Resume point, Status/Reason.

</pre>

'''Notes'''
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

==hmt-linux==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)

==hmt-solaris==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)

==Hrwconv==

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

==HTTPS==

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On

==Humaxrw==

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.

<pre>
humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
-d <list> delete recordings
-g <list> get recordings to current directory
-h help (this text)
-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
-u <list> unprotect recordings
-v version
-x extended listing for humaxdiag
-w pause at the end waiting for a keypress
-y answer yes to all prompts

Advanced Options
-D Delete time shift recording buffers
-E Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
-H <list> get hre files for recordings
-M <n> modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
-O <n> offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
-V <n> modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
-Z Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from source Humax disk
and copy to destination Humax disk
-g <list> get recordings from source disk
and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-n no info - use if corruption is really bad
-g <list> get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
<pre>
humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
-C Skip checksum validation.
-c <arguments> Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
-d<level> Enable debugging at level.
-l Show contents of HDF file (default).
-o Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
-r Don't compress blocks when creating.
-S<section> Extract only the numbered section.
-t Test archive (validate checksums).
-x Extract files.
-s Also show/extract member checksums.

Examples:

View HDF: humidify file.hdf
Test HDF: humidify -t file.hdf
Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
Create HDF: humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)

</pre>

A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
It contains the following files:-

[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]

==Hwctl==

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !

==Id3v2==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].

Available commands:

<pre>
-h, --help Display this help and exit
-f, --list-frames Display all possible frames for id3v2
-L, --list-genres Lists all id3v1 genres
-v, --version Display version information and exit
-l, --list Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
-R, --list-rfc822 Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
-d, --delete-v2 Deletes id3v2 tags
-s, --delete-v1 Deletes id3v1 tags
-D, --delete-all Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
-C, --convert Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
-1, --id3v1-only Writes only id3v1 tag
-2, --id3v2-only Writes only id3v2 tag
-a, --artist "ARTIST" Set the artist information
-A, --album "ALBUM" Set the album title information
-t, --song "SONG" Set the song title information
-c, --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
Set the comment information (both
description and language optional)
-g, --genre num Set the genre number
-y, --year num Set the year
-T, --track num/num Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
</pre>

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

==In Use==

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].

==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.

==Jpnevulator==

Serial Port Sniffer.

==Joe==

Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].

==Kernels==

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support

==Lighttpd==

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/ '''HERE''']

==LDD==

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line

==Libpcre==

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library

==Libunwind==

Utility used with the Crashdiag package

==LibParted==

Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package

==Libsndfile==

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.

==Loaders==

{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}

The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']

==M4==

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']

==Maintenance Mode==

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]

==Mediatomb==
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']

==Mongoose==

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.

==Multienv==

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.

==Multi-mode==

[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]

==Mvdisks==

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

'''Notes'''

#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
''' DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. '''

To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
#reboot the Humax
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder

==Nano==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==New Portal==

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]

==Newk==

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package

==Nicesplice==

A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]

==Nsplice==

Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==NTFS Progs==

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS

==Ntp Client==

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']

==Nugget==

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

<pre>
nugget <command>
ping - Test nugget connectivity.
status - Show nugget status and version.
schedule.load - Load recording schedule from disk.
schedule.save - Save recording schedule to disk.
schedule.slot - Update timers for schedule slot.
schedule.db - sqlite3 database handle info.
schedule.epg - Display EPG information for slot.
schedule.timers - Show internal timers.
cryptokey - Set or display encryption key.
</pre>

==OPKG==

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg download auto-unprotect HID= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

 opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

 opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants

==Opkg-beta==

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen

==Parted==

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]

==Popol==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]

<pre>

-s, --songname set songname
-a, --artist set artist
-l, --album set album
-c, --comment set comment
-y, --year set release year
-t, --tracknum set track number

</pre>

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Portal Xtra1==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Poweron-Channel==

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings

*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None

*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)

'''NOTES'''
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
<pre>
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1

</pre>

==Procps==

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Python==

A package that adds the Python programming language

==Python Setuptools==

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]

==Qtube==

Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Youtube-dl | '''Youtube-dl''']]

==Recmon==

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.

Examples
<pre>
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
</pre>

==Rc app bridge==

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

'''Notes'''
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled

==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option

==Redring ==

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

{| border="1"
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
! width="250"| Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
! 11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
! Scrolling On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Clock
! Clock Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Blue Brightness

Red Brightness
! Fixed
100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable

Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%

0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Amber Brightness
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11%
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

 HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

'''Notes'''

*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

==Renumber==
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

'''Notes'''

*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package

==Reset Webif==

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==

Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Mobile==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==rs==

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

Options:
-d[level] Set debug level.
-D<seconds> Sleep for random(seconds).
-h Show help text.
-i Show detected machine info.
-q Be more quiet.

Commands:
register <email> Register this device.
push Push scheduled events.
cmd Retrieve next queued command.
ack <id> Acknowledge command <id>.
status Show device registration status.
log <msg> Send log message to server.
epg Distributed EPG management.

</pre>

==rs time==

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time

==RMA==

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

'''Notes'''
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page

==Rsvsync==

Boot-time reservation sync service

==Rsync==

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

 rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup 

This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ 

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ 

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ 

[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html '''More Info.''']

==rt3070==

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware

==Safe Mode==

Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the [[Firmware_Downloads | '''Firmware Download page''']]

'''Note''' if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.

==Samba==

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

'''Tips'''

#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

==Schedchk==

Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG

See the [[Schedchk|user guide]] for further details

==Scons==

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software

==Screensaver==

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-

{| border="1"
|-
!3X5
>>>
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
!Neon
>>>
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
!Avatar
>>>
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]
|-
! 7Seg
>>>
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
! Neon-Blue
>>>
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
!Wedge
>>>
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
|-
! Dot
>>>
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
! Agen
>>>
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
!Cursor
>>>
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
|-
! VFD
>>>
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
! Glass-Blue
>>>
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
!Maze
>>>
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
|}

'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server

''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

<pre>
humax# screensaver
1: 3X5
2: 7Seg
3: Black
4: Cursor
5: Humax Default
6: Neon
7: Neon-Blue
8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
'''NOTES:-'''
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default

==Sed==

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']

==Series Filer==

'''NOTE'''

'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

'''NOTE:-'''

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==Sh (SHell)==

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language

==Sidecar==

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files

Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

Command line options :-
<pre>
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

-n : Create new .nts file
-h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
-x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
-c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
-t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
-p : Display progress bar
-i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.

humax#
</pre>

'''NOTES'''
# The Sidecar package is not installed by default and should be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
# If provided with no command options, Sidecar displays the help and exits.
# Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application, may not be compatible. In particular, the file should be in "M2TS" format (192-byte headers instead of 188-byte) even though it has the .ts extension.
# There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''Here''']]
# Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings
# Sidecar cannot process encrypted files (as per original recordings). If the .ts file is encrypted, Sidecar will create dummy hmt and nts files which are sufficient to allow the file to be decrypted, i.e.:-
#*Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
#*Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
#*When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
#*There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
:: Alternatively, recordings missing the original .hmt file can be decrypted using the Stripts utility.

==Smartmontools==

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A 

or

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
<pre>

humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME FLAG VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE UPDATED WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate 0x000f 114 099 006 Pre-fail Always - 66811863
3 Spin_Up_Time 0x0003 097 097 000 Pre-fail Always - 0
4 Start_Stop_Count 0x0032 098 098 020 Old_age Always - 2878
5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct 0x0033 100 100 036 Pre-fail Always - 0
7 Seek_Error_Rate 0x000f 078 060 030 Pre-fail Always - 70502101
9 Power_On_Hours 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3294
10 Spin_Retry_Count 0x0013 100 100 097 Pre-fail Always - 0
12 Power_Cycle_Count 0x0032 099 099 020 Old_age Always - 1439
184 End-to-End_Error 0x0032 100 100 099 Old_age Always - 0
187 Reported_Uncorrect 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3
188 Command_Timeout 0x0032 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
189 High_Fly_Writes 0x003a 093 093 000 Old_age Always - 7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022 055 044 045 Old_age Always In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius 0x0022 045 056 000 Old_age Always - 45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered 0x001a 048 039 000 Old_age Always - 66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector 0x0012 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable 0x0010 100 100 000 Old_age Offline - 0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count 0x003e 200 200 000 Old_age Always - 0
</pre>

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda

==SQLite3==

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)

==SRT==

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

'''Notes'''

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/ '''HERE''']

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail

==Status==

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
</pre>
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen

==Strace==

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.

==Stripts==
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

<pre>
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
-a Analyse an input file.
-A Quickly analyse an input file.
-c Check if there are any EIT packets.
-C Show address of first EIT packet.
-D Dump NTS file.
-E Check if file is encrypted.
-f Also fix PAT packets.
-F Only fix PAT packets.
-T Dump TS file.
-v Verbose.
-X Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
-Z Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
-z Analyse entire TS file.
-@ <key> Decrypt recording with <key>.
-/ <key> Check encryption key against recording. (* See NOTE Below)
-d [level] Increase debug level or set debug level.

* NOTE :- This option has been reported to return "Incorrect" when using the correct key in the Windows version
</pre>

 stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

 stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

 stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

 stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

'''NOTE'''
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

<pre>
stripts -@@ <input> <output>

stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"
</pre>

1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key, (When the process is run on the original Humax recorder)

2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a different Humax unit (or on a computer), the original unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630 (adding a '3' before each digit from the serial number)

Here is a key compiled from the info. on the Humax label (Bottom panel) :-

[[File:Humax-Key.png|300px|thumb|left]]

"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)

There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities '''See Link HERE''']

==Swapper==

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

==Sweeper==

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

'''Command Line operation'''

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor

Example 1)

 action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

 action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

 lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

 action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

 action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

 folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

 folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-
*lines starting with '#' are comments
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

<pre>
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
</pre>

==Subtitles==
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]

==Swifi==

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi

==Sysmon==
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

*Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

*CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

*Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic

==System Flush==

The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.

The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.

==TCL Check==

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files

==Tcpfix==

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses

==TCP Ping==

Simple TCP ping utility.

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See ''' RED ''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al 

<pre>
C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>
</pre>

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*''' [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' '''
*''' [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf '''
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details

==Telnet Commands==

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
* cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
* cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
* pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
* ls -al = list contents of the current directory
* touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory

==Tempmon==

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C

==Text Editors==

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]

==Tmenu==

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
<pre>
Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

/-------------------------\
| T E L N E T M E N U |
\-------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
2 - Remove web interface password.
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
x - Exit and close connection.
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option:

</pre>

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings

==Tnftp==

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

 transmission-remote 

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
*When highlighted select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

===Blocklist===

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

'''Notes'''
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.

==Transportx==

This package enhances the transport function of the Humax after installing (and a system re-boot), the pause button gains a new function, after the initial pause further presses of this button will step the paused image forward by a single frame (approx. 1/25 second), press play to resume normal viewing

After the SLOW button is pressed, the following functions are also available :-

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/4 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/8 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/16 fwd

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Rew button: x1 rew
*Rew button: x1/2 rew *
*Rew button: x1/4 rew
*Rew button: x1/8 rew *

Press play to exit

* It has been reported that these options may not be available

==Trm==

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==TSTools==

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]

==TTYSnoop==

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.

==Tunefix==
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN

'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

==Tunefix Update==

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.

==TV Diary==

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]

==Uinput==

User-space input kernel module

==Unencrypt==

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
* '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' 

*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
<pre>
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
</pre>

*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

*Dustbin Name
*Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

==Version==

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
<pre>
humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
Web interface version: 1.2.1
Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#
</pre>

==Vfdtest==
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

 vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

 vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off

==Vi==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).

==Vim Basic==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Vim Standard==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''

==Virtual-Disk2==

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Backup/Restore Schedule===
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

NOTE : An auto-schedule-restore backup, is a seperate file held in /mod/boot/schedule.ab

===Change Channel===

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

===Change Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Create Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Delete===

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on

===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Detect Adverts===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

===Disable AR===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Enable Auto-Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

===Enable Auto-Dedup===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])

===Enable Auto-Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])

===Enable Auto Expire===
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first

===Bookmarks===
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

===Enable Auto-MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
===Enable Auto-Shrink===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])

===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" 

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

===Extract To MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
*The equivalent command line would be:-
<pre>
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>
</pre>

===Enable Auto-mpg===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

===File Editor===

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

===Lock===

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

===Mark as Watched===

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

===Manual Event===
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
*Create : Recording or Reminder
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
*Channel : Number / Name
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

===Multi Mode Recording===

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]

===Network Settings===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
'''Notes'''
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

===New Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]

===Play===

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

===Rename (File)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

*New Filename
*New Medialist Title
*New Synopsis
*New Guidance Text
*New Genre

===Rename (Folder)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

===Reset New Flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

===Save Last Streamed Content===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

===Set Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

'''Notes'''
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

===Sidecar Files===

see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]

===Split===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

===Shrink (stripts)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

===Sweeper Rules===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

===Toggle no-sweep flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

===View Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture

==Web-IF Channel Icons==

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels

==Webif-Charts==

Chart modules for the web interface

==Webif-iphone==

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==Webif Style Sheet==

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
<pre>
img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
</pre>

Change the size of the pie chart:-

<pre>
#tbdiskpie
{
width: 100px;
height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
top: 7px !important;
}
</pre>

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
<pre>
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
</pre>

Change font colour or size :-
<pre>
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
</pre>

Change Icon size
<pre>
img.button { height: 50px; }
</pre>

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

<pre>
#toTop, #toTopHover
{
background: transparent !important;
display: none !important;
opacity: 100 !important;
}
</pre>

Remove EPG ENC icons

<pre>
img.epgenc { display: none; }
</pre>

==Webshell==

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access

==webm==

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
<pre>
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
</pre>

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

'''Notes:-'''
*There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
*Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported

When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-
<pre>
wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk
</pre>

The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail

==Wireless Helper==

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle

==WOL==

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
<pre>
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
</pre>
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
<pre>
echo /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
</pre>
NOTES:-
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by

==Xtra1 Portal==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]

==Youtube-dl==

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
</pre>

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code extension resolution note
249 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171 webm audio only DASH audio 6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140 m4a audio only DASH audio 145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278 webm 256x144 144p 34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242 webm 426x240 240p 44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160 mp4 256x144 144p 50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134 mp4 640x360 360p 74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243 webm 640x360 360p 78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133 mp4 426x240 240p 87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244 webm 854x480 480p 116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135 mp4 854x480 480p 117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136 mp4 1280x720 720p 191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247 webm 1280x720 720p 203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137 mp4 1920x1080 1080p 312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248 webm 1920x1080 1080p 357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271 webm 2560x1440 1440p 609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313 webm 3840x2160 2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17 3gp 176x144 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36 3gp 320x180 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43 webm 640x360 medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18 mp4 640x360 medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22 mp4 1280x720 hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
</pre>

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
</pre>

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
</pre>

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme '''Github Notes''']

A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-

[https://rg3.github.io/youtube-dl/supportedsites.html '''Available Sites''']

'''Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version'''

Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, STV, dplay

'''Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version'''

Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay

==Zeroconf==

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.

==Zip==

zip utilities for compressing files :-
<pre>
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
can include the special name - to compress standard input.
If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
-f freshen: only changed files -u update: only changed or new files
-d delete entries in zipfile -m move into zipfile (delete OS files)
-r recurse into directories -j junk (don't record) directory names
-0 store only -l convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
-1 compress faster -9 compress better
-q quiet operation -v verbose operation/print version info
-c add one-line comments -z add zipfile comment
-@ read names from stdin -o make zipfile as old as latest entry
-x exclude the following names -i include only the following names
-F fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D do not add directory entries
-A adjust self-extracting exe -J junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
-T test zipfile integrity -X eXclude eXtra file attributes
-y store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
-e encrypt -n don't compress these suffixes
</pre>

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2022-08-29T10:22:17Z

Black Hole: Added note to document action when no command line options are provided.

'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}

Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]

==7Zip==

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.

==Android-Remote==
[[File:h-rem1.png|100px|thumb|right]]
[[File:h-rem2.png|100px|thumb|right]]

This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video
recorder and also the Foxsat, requirements are :-

*[https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Custom_Firmware_Overview '''Custom FirmWare'''] installed
*The [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/WebIf_Remote_Controller '''IR Package'''] Installed
*The [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Android App '''] installed on your phone / tablet
*Connection to the same home network as the phone / tablet.

Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs, the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size and the Foxsat

The Android App. is available [https://tynecomp.co.uk/humax/HumaxFoxT2_base.zip '''Click Here''']

==Arbookmarks==

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

==At==

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']

==Auto Schedule Restore==

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

'''NOTES:-'''
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-
*Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.

==Badnts==

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
'''Notes'''
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed

==Bash==

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']] Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

==Blocklist==

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].

==Bookmark==

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed

==BootHDR==

<big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') 

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]

==Boot_Settings==

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]

==Bsed==

Binary-safe search/replace utility.

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==cfupdater==

A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.

Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-

<pre>
/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>
</pre>

If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then
<pre> tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log
</pre>

==Channeldel==

Note: now superseded by tunefix

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later

==ChaseDecrypt==

Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget

See [[ChaseDecrypt]] for further details

==Chaseget==

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==CLI==

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#

==Content Sharing==

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content

==Crashdiag==

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it

==Crash Log==

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
</pre>

==Cron==

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

<pre>
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

</pre>

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run
#at 2AM every day
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
#every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

 crontab -l 

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line

==Cryptokey==

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-

<pre>
humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>
</pre>

The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax

==Curl Command==

curl command line utility.

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==DB Update==

General boot-time database update utility

==Dedup (Command Line)==
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Dedup (Series Helper File)==

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

<pre>
Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
</pre>

The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']

==DeRMA==

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message

==Detectads==

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package

==Disable DSO==

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

==Disable OTA==

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax

'''Note''' The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation

==Display==

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

 /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' 

The display can be blanked with :-

 /sbin/display ' ' 

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

 /sbin/display '$he:lp' 

'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

==DLNA-Filter==

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

'''NOTES'''
*DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank

==DLNA-Servername==

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed

==Dropbear SSH==

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys

==Dropbear SFTP==

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']

==DUMA==

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.

==Dustbin==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Undelete | '''Undelete''']]

==Dvbsnoop==

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.

==E2fs_Progs==

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].

==[Eject]==
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-

*USB interface name
*USB Device name
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
*Device % used
*Device capacity
*Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

'''NOTES'''
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

==EPG==

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

When using the ''epg'' command on HD-FOX, note that:
# There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
# To access the cache, use ''epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata''.

==Epgfix==

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).

You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Epgpatch==

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview

==Enable Telnet==

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

<pre>
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
</pre>

==Exfat==

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT

==Exfat Builder==

'''See Exfat above'''

[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.

==EXTRA.css==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]

==Fan==

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

'''Notes'''

*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run

<pre>
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
</pre>

==Ffmpeg==

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3

Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']

==Fix-disk==

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]

==Fix-disk (USB)==

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].

==Fix Flash Packages ==

If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

'''NOTES'''
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==Flatview==

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

'''NOTES'''

*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

'''Exceptions'''

*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

==Flexget==

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

 */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron 

* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']

==Flexview==

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]

==Forcedate==

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].

==Foscam==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
* login = humaxftp
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==Foxlink==

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]

==Fuse==

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.

==Genre Icons==

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]

==Git==

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.

==Grep==

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

<pre>
humax# cat original-file.txt

-H Add 'filename:' prefix
-h Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-q Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v Select non-matching lines
-s Suppress open and read errors
-r Recurse
-i Ignore case
-w Match whole words only
-F PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N Match up to N times per file
-A N Print N lines of trailing context
-B N Print N lines of leading context
-C N Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-v Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#
</pre>

==Gnu Fdisk==

GNU fdisk.

==Hdparm==

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.

==HMT==

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

'''hmt Options List'''
<pre>
humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
Commands:
+/-new Mark/unmark recording as new.
+/-lock Mark/unmark recording as locked.
+/-guidance Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
+/-protect Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
+/-encrypted Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
+/-shrunk Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
+/-dedup Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
+/-detectads Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
-p Display parseable file information (see *).
-list Display file information (default).
-bookmarks Display bookmarks.
+addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+clearbookmarks
+settitle=<new title>
+setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
+setguidance=<new guidance>
+setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
+setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
+setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
+setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
+patch8=offset:value patch 8-bit value
+patch16=offset:value patch 16-bit value
+patch32=offset:value patch 32-bit value
Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
+read8=offset read 8-bit value
+read16=offset read 16-bit value
+read32=offset read 32-bit value
Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
Resume point, Status/Reason.

</pre>

'''Notes'''
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

==hmt-linux==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)

==hmt-solaris==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)

==Hrwconv==

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

==HTTPS==

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On

==Humaxrw==

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.

<pre>
humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
-d <list> delete recordings
-g <list> get recordings to current directory
-h help (this text)
-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
-u <list> unprotect recordings
-v version
-x extended listing for humaxdiag
-w pause at the end waiting for a keypress
-y answer yes to all prompts

Advanced Options
-D Delete time shift recording buffers
-E Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
-H <list> get hre files for recordings
-M <n> modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
-O <n> offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
-V <n> modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
-Z Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from source Humax disk
and copy to destination Humax disk
-g <list> get recordings from source disk
and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-n no info - use if corruption is really bad
-g <list> get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
<pre>
humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
-C Skip checksum validation.
-c <arguments> Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
-d<level> Enable debugging at level.
-l Show contents of HDF file (default).
-o Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
-r Don't compress blocks when creating.
-S<section> Extract only the numbered section.
-t Test archive (validate checksums).
-x Extract files.
-s Also show/extract member checksums.

Examples:

View HDF: humidify file.hdf
Test HDF: humidify -t file.hdf
Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
Create HDF: humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)

</pre>

A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
It contains the following files:-

[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]

==Hwctl==

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !

==Id3v2==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].

Available commands:

<pre>
-h, --help Display this help and exit
-f, --list-frames Display all possible frames for id3v2
-L, --list-genres Lists all id3v1 genres
-v, --version Display version information and exit
-l, --list Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
-R, --list-rfc822 Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
-d, --delete-v2 Deletes id3v2 tags
-s, --delete-v1 Deletes id3v1 tags
-D, --delete-all Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
-C, --convert Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
-1, --id3v1-only Writes only id3v1 tag
-2, --id3v2-only Writes only id3v2 tag
-a, --artist "ARTIST" Set the artist information
-A, --album "ALBUM" Set the album title information
-t, --song "SONG" Set the song title information
-c, --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
Set the comment information (both
description and language optional)
-g, --genre num Set the genre number
-y, --year num Set the year
-T, --track num/num Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
</pre>

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

==In Use==

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].

==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.

==Jpnevulator==

Serial Port Sniffer.

==Joe==

Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].

==Kernels==

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support

==Lighttpd==

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/ '''HERE''']

==LDD==

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line

==Libpcre==

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library

==Libunwind==

Utility used with the Crashdiag package

==LibParted==

Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package

==Libsndfile==

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.

==Loaders==

{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}

The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']

==M4==

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']

==Maintenance Mode==

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]

==Mediatomb==
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']

==Mongoose==

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.

==Multienv==

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.

==Multi-mode==

[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]

==Mvdisks==

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

'''Notes'''

#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
''' DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. '''

To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
#reboot the Humax
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder

==Nano==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==New Portal==

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]

==Newk==

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package

==Nicesplice==

A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]

==Nsplice==

Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==NTFS Progs==

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS

==Ntp Client==

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']

==Nugget==

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

<pre>
nugget <command>
ping - Test nugget connectivity.
status - Show nugget status and version.
schedule.load - Load recording schedule from disk.
schedule.save - Save recording schedule to disk.
schedule.slot - Update timers for schedule slot.
schedule.db - sqlite3 database handle info.
schedule.epg - Display EPG information for slot.
schedule.timers - Show internal timers.
cryptokey - Set or display encryption key.
</pre>

==OPKG==

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg download auto-unprotect HID= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

 opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

 opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants

==Opkg-beta==

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen

==Parted==

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]

==Popol==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]

<pre>

-s, --songname set songname
-a, --artist set artist
-l, --album set album
-c, --comment set comment
-y, --year set release year
-t, --tracknum set track number

</pre>

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Portal Xtra1==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Poweron-Channel==

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings

*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None

*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)

'''NOTES'''
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
<pre>
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1

</pre>

==Procps==

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Python==

A package that adds the Python programming language

==Python Setuptools==

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]

==Qtube==

Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Youtube-dl | '''Youtube-dl''']]

==Recmon==

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.

Examples
<pre>
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
</pre>

==Rc app bridge==

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

'''Notes'''
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled

==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option

==Redring ==

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

{| border="1"
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
! width="250"| Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
! 11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
! Scrolling On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Clock
! Clock Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Blue Brightness

Red Brightness
! Fixed
100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable

Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%

0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Amber Brightness
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11%
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

 HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

'''Notes'''

*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

==Renumber==
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

'''Notes'''

*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package

==Reset Webif==

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==

Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Mobile==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==rs==

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

Options:
-d[level] Set debug level.
-D<seconds> Sleep for random(seconds).
-h Show help text.
-i Show detected machine info.
-q Be more quiet.

Commands:
register <email> Register this device.
push Push scheduled events.
cmd Retrieve next queued command.
ack <id> Acknowledge command <id>.
status Show device registration status.
log <msg> Send log message to server.
epg Distributed EPG management.

</pre>

==rs time==

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time

==RMA==

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

'''Notes'''
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page

==Rsvsync==

Boot-time reservation sync service

==Rsync==

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

 rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup 

This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ 

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ 

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ 

[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html '''More Info.''']

==rt3070==

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware

==Safe Mode==

Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the [[Firmware_Downloads | '''Firmware Download page''']]

'''Note''' if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.

==Samba==

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

'''Tips'''

#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

==Schedchk==

Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG

See the [[Schedchk|user guide]] for further details

==Scons==

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software

==Screensaver==

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-

{| border="1"
|-
!3X5
>>>
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
!Neon
>>>
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
!Avatar
>>>
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]
|-
! 7Seg
>>>
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
! Neon-Blue
>>>
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
!Wedge
>>>
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
|-
! Dot
>>>
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
! Agen
>>>
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
!Cursor
>>>
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
|-
! VFD
>>>
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
! Glass-Blue
>>>
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
!Maze
>>>
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
|}

'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server

''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

<pre>
humax# screensaver
1: 3X5
2: 7Seg
3: Black
4: Cursor
5: Humax Default
6: Neon
7: Neon-Blue
8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
'''NOTES:-'''
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default

==Sed==

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']

==Series Filer==

'''NOTE'''

'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

'''NOTE:-'''

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==Sh (SHell)==

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language

==Sidecar==

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files

Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

Command line options :-
<pre>
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

-n : Create new .nts file
-h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
-x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
-c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
-t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
-p : Display progress bar
-i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.

humax#
</pre>

'''NOTES'''
# The Sidecar package must be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
# If provided with no command options, Sidecar displays the help and exits.
# TS files must be decrypted before running Sidecar, If the TS is encrypted see note 5 below
#Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application may not be compatible
#There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''Here''']]
# if the ts file is encrypted, the package will create dummy hmt and nts files to allow the file to be decrypted i.e :-
*Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
*Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
*When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
*There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
*Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings

==Smartmontools==

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A 

or

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
<pre>

humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME FLAG VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE UPDATED WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate 0x000f 114 099 006 Pre-fail Always - 66811863
3 Spin_Up_Time 0x0003 097 097 000 Pre-fail Always - 0
4 Start_Stop_Count 0x0032 098 098 020 Old_age Always - 2878
5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct 0x0033 100 100 036 Pre-fail Always - 0
7 Seek_Error_Rate 0x000f 078 060 030 Pre-fail Always - 70502101
9 Power_On_Hours 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3294
10 Spin_Retry_Count 0x0013 100 100 097 Pre-fail Always - 0
12 Power_Cycle_Count 0x0032 099 099 020 Old_age Always - 1439
184 End-to-End_Error 0x0032 100 100 099 Old_age Always - 0
187 Reported_Uncorrect 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3
188 Command_Timeout 0x0032 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
189 High_Fly_Writes 0x003a 093 093 000 Old_age Always - 7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022 055 044 045 Old_age Always In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius 0x0022 045 056 000 Old_age Always - 45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered 0x001a 048 039 000 Old_age Always - 66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector 0x0012 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable 0x0010 100 100 000 Old_age Offline - 0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count 0x003e 200 200 000 Old_age Always - 0
</pre>

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda

==SQLite3==

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)

==SRT==

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

'''Notes'''

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/ '''HERE''']

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail

==Status==

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
</pre>
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen

==Strace==

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.

==Stripts==
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

<pre>
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
-a Analyse an input file.
-A Quickly analyse an input file.
-c Check if there are any EIT packets.
-C Show address of first EIT packet.
-D Dump NTS file.
-E Check if file is encrypted.
-f Also fix PAT packets.
-F Only fix PAT packets.
-T Dump TS file.
-v Verbose.
-X Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
-Z Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
-z Analyse entire TS file.
-@ <key> Decrypt recording with <key>.
-/ <key> Check encryption key against recording. (* See NOTE Below)
-d [level] Increase debug level or set debug level.

* NOTE :- This option has been reported to return "Incorrect" when using the correct key in the Windows version
</pre>

 stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

 stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

 stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

 stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

'''NOTE'''
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

<pre>
stripts -@@ <input> <output>

stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"
</pre>

1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key, (When the process is run on the original Humax recorder)

2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a different Humax unit (or on a computer), the original unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630 (adding a '3' before each digit from the serial number)

Here is a key compiled from the info. on the Humax label (Bottom panel) :-

[[File:Humax-Key.png|300px|thumb|left]]

"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)

There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities '''See Link HERE''']

==Swapper==

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

==Sweeper==

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

'''Command Line operation'''

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor

Example 1)

 action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

 action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

 lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

 action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

 action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

 folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

 folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-
*lines starting with '#' are comments
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

<pre>
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
</pre>

==Subtitles==
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]

==Swifi==

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi

==Sysmon==
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

*Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

*CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

*Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic

==System Flush==

The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.

The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.

==TCL Check==

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files

==Tcpfix==

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses

==TCP Ping==

Simple TCP ping utility.

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See ''' RED ''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al 

<pre>
C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>
</pre>

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*''' [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' '''
*''' [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf '''
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details

==Telnet Commands==

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
* cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
* cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
* pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
* ls -al = list contents of the current directory
* touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory

==Tempmon==

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C

==Text Editors==

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]

==Tmenu==

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
<pre>
Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

/-------------------------\
| T E L N E T M E N U |
\-------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
2 - Remove web interface password.
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
x - Exit and close connection.
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option:

</pre>

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings

==Tnftp==

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

 transmission-remote 

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
*When highlighted select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

===Blocklist===

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

'''Notes'''
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.

==Transportx==

This package enhances the transport function of the Humax after installing (and a system re-boot), the pause button gains a new function, after the initial pause further presses of this button will step the paused image forward by a single frame (approx. 1/25 second), press play to resume normal viewing

After the SLOW button is pressed, the following functions are also available :-

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/4 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/8 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/16 fwd

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Rew button: x1 rew
*Rew button: x1/2 rew *
*Rew button: x1/4 rew
*Rew button: x1/8 rew *

Press play to exit

* It has been reported that these options may not be available

==Trm==

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==TSTools==

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]

==TTYSnoop==

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.

==Tunefix==
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN

'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

==Tunefix Update==

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.

==TV Diary==

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]

==Uinput==

User-space input kernel module

==Unencrypt==

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
* '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' 

*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
<pre>
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
</pre>

*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

*Dustbin Name
*Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

==Version==

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
<pre>
humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
Web interface version: 1.2.1
Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#
</pre>

==Vfdtest==
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

 vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

 vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off

==Vi==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).

==Vim Basic==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Vim Standard==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''

==Virtual-Disk2==

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Backup/Restore Schedule===
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

NOTE : An auto-schedule-restore backup, is a seperate file held in /mod/boot/schedule.ab

===Change Channel===

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

===Change Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Create Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Delete===

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on

===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Detect Adverts===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

===Disable AR===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Enable Auto-Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

===Enable Auto-Dedup===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])

===Enable Auto-Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])

===Enable Auto Expire===
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first

===Bookmarks===
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

===Enable Auto-MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
===Enable Auto-Shrink===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])

===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" 

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

===Extract To MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
*The equivalent command line would be:-
<pre>
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>
</pre>

===Enable Auto-mpg===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

===File Editor===

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

===Lock===

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

===Mark as Watched===

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

===Manual Event===
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
*Create : Recording or Reminder
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
*Channel : Number / Name
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

===Multi Mode Recording===

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]

===Network Settings===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
'''Notes'''
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

===New Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]

===Play===

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

===Rename (File)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

*New Filename
*New Medialist Title
*New Synopsis
*New Guidance Text
*New Genre

===Rename (Folder)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

===Reset New Flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

===Save Last Streamed Content===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

===Set Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

'''Notes'''
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

===Sidecar Files===

see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]

===Split===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

===Shrink (stripts)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

===Sweeper Rules===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

===Toggle no-sweep flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

===View Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture

==Web-IF Channel Icons==

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels

==Webif-Charts==

Chart modules for the web interface

==Webif-iphone==

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==Webif Style Sheet==

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
<pre>
img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
</pre>

Change the size of the pie chart:-

<pre>
#tbdiskpie
{
width: 100px;
height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
top: 7px !important;
}
</pre>

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
<pre>
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
</pre>

Change font colour or size :-
<pre>
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
</pre>

Change Icon size
<pre>
img.button { height: 50px; }
</pre>

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

<pre>
#toTop, #toTopHover
{
background: transparent !important;
display: none !important;
opacity: 100 !important;
}
</pre>

Remove EPG ENC icons

<pre>
img.epgenc { display: none; }
</pre>

==Webshell==

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access

==webm==

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
<pre>
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
</pre>

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

'''Notes:-'''
*There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
*Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported

When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-
<pre>
wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk
</pre>

The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail

==Wireless Helper==

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle

==WOL==

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
<pre>
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
</pre>
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
<pre>
echo /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
</pre>
NOTES:-
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by

==Xtra1 Portal==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]

==Youtube-dl==

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
</pre>

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code extension resolution note
249 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171 webm audio only DASH audio 6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140 m4a audio only DASH audio 145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278 webm 256x144 144p 34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242 webm 426x240 240p 44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160 mp4 256x144 144p 50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134 mp4 640x360 360p 74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243 webm 640x360 360p 78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133 mp4 426x240 240p 87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244 webm 854x480 480p 116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135 mp4 854x480 480p 117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136 mp4 1280x720 720p 191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247 webm 1280x720 720p 203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137 mp4 1920x1080 1080p 312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248 webm 1920x1080 1080p 357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271 webm 2560x1440 1440p 609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313 webm 3840x2160 2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17 3gp 176x144 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36 3gp 320x180 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43 webm 640x360 medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18 mp4 640x360 medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22 mp4 1280x720 hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
</pre>

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
</pre>

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
</pre>

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme '''Github Notes''']

A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-

[https://rg3.github.io/youtube-dl/supportedsites.html '''Available Sites''']

'''Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version'''

Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, STV, dplay

'''Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version'''

Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay

==Zeroconf==

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.

==Zip==

zip utilities for compressing files :-
<pre>
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
can include the special name - to compress standard input.
If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
-f freshen: only changed files -u update: only changed or new files
-d delete entries in zipfile -m move into zipfile (delete OS files)
-r recurse into directories -j junk (don't record) directory names
-0 store only -l convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
-1 compress faster -9 compress better
-q quiet operation -v verbose operation/print version info
-c add one-line comments -z add zipfile comment
-@ read names from stdin -o make zipfile as old as latest entry
-x exclude the following names -i include only the following names
-F fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D do not add directory entries
-A adjust self-extracting exe -J junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
-T test zipfile integrity -X eXclude eXtra file attributes
-y store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
-e encrypt -n don't compress these suffixes
</pre>

Hardware Fixes

2022-04-03T16:59:14Z

Black Hole: Little or no evidence the device was sub-standard, best not even hint it. Value was wrong anyway.

==Reboot Cycle==

SYMPTOMS

The Humax repeatedly re-boots when powering from standby every few seconds, as this can occur for several reasons you can narrow down the possible causes by disconnecting the red power cable between the main board and the Hard Disk drive while the Humax is disconnected from the mains supply, if the Humax then powers up without re-boots, there are only two reported problems that cause this, one is the presents of a corrupted file on the HDD and the other is a failed capacitor that affects the timing of the HDD turn on procedure, this fix details how to locate and replace the faulty capacitor.
The faulty component is a 4u7 (4.7 microfarad) 35V electrolytic capacitor and is located on the front edge of the main board (See red ring in picture)
[[File:Board.png||200px|thumb|left]]

Here is a close-up of the faulty capacitor
[[File:old-c.JPG|200px|thumb|left]]

Here is part of the circuit diagram showing the faulty 4u7 capacitor :-
[[File:diagram.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]

The fix is to replace this capacitor with a 4u7 with a new one, the replacement does not need to be a surface mounted component, a 25V 4u7 radial capacitor can be used, NOTE :- It has been suggested that you can remove the old capacitor by 'twisting' it, however I would not reconmmend doing this as it could damage the board, the component can be removed using a soldering iron on the two visible solder pads (see red pointer above), one at a time

Here is the board with the old capacitor removed :-
[[File:pad.JPG|200px|thumb|left]]

NOTE :- When fitting the new component, the correct polarity MUST be observed, the Negative '-' is furthest away from the edge of the board

Here is the board with the new Radial capacitor installed :-

[[File:new-c.jpg|200px|thumb|left]]

Although quite a few users looked into this re-booting problem, the main credit must go to Newcoppiceman who identified the faulty component, for more details see this post :-

[https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/start-up-fails-when-hdd-connected.10164/page-5#post-158267 '''starting at post #81 here''']

'''Other Tests'''

There has been some suggestion that as the Humaxs are getting old that other SMD electrolytic capacitors may also cause problems, however tests by
[https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/start-up-fails-when-hdd-connected.10164/post-160361 '''Stummery'''] found no other faulty devices.

FAQs

2021-05-18T07:51:37Z

Black Hole: Added information how to test whether a dongle is suitable

===What does the Customised firmware allow me to do?===

Add extra or enhanced features to your Humax HDR FOX T2 and HD FOX T2. Some features will add 'Every Day' enhancements such as Add to recording schedule remotely, Add more sites to the Humax Portal and Auto Unprotection of Hi-Def programs, while other utilities are for advanced developers. An overview of the Custom Firmware features are listed [[Custom_Firmware_Overview|'''HERE''']]

===What will happen if / when Humax transmits an Over-the-air (OTA) update?===

The customised software will be overwritten. Any services installed by the customised software will become dormant. Any files on the hard disk that were created with the customised software will remain in place and will be accessible when a new version of the customised software is applied on top of the OTA version.

===How can I compile software to run on the Humax?===

Have a look at the [[Compile Software for the Humax]] and [[Create Packages]] HOW-TOs.

=== What Does this EPG Icon Mean?===

[[File:icons.jpg]]

===What Does this Front Panel Icon Mean?===

[[File:front-icons.png|600px|left]]

{| border="1" cellpadding="2"
|-
| 1. TV Mode
| 2. Radio Mode
| 3. Full Res. (1080p) v-format
| 4. High Definition
|-
| 5.Dolby Digtial File Playing
| bgcolor=#ffbbbb| 6. Dolby Digital Plus
| bgcolor=#ffbbbb| 7. Dolby Digital ProLogic?
| 8. USB Device connected
|-
| 9. Recording
| 10. Play (during re-play)
| 11. Pause
| 12. Schedule timer
|-
| 13. Wifi connected
| bgcolor=#ffbbbb| 14. HDMI CEC?
| bgcolor=#ffbbbb| 15. E-Mail?
| 16. Hard Disk Free Space
|}

 HIDE ** = Not Used

===Where is the Remote Control Sensor?===

It is quite difficult to see the Remote Control Sensor on the HDR Fox T2. Keeping this area clear will improve Remote Control sensitivity.

[[File:sensor.png|600px|left]]

===Why is My Remote Flashing all the Mode LEDS ?===

If your Remote Flashes all four 'Mode' LEDS in sequence when you press the green power button, it is indicating that the battery level is low.

[[File:remote-anim.gif|left]]

===How to avoid Remote Macro Problems===

Many ‘All-in-One’ / Harmony type Remote Controls have a ‘Macro’ facility, where a single key press will send multiple commands to carry out a series of operations. However problems can occur when the original remote control uses a single button to toggle power On / Off functions because different pieces of equipment may already be in the desired state. Sony and several other makers get around this by having separate buttons for On and Off, however the Humax remote doesn’t have this.

''' Solution'''

Send ‘000’ to the Humax HDR T2 as a ‘Turn On Only’ signal, thereby getting around the possible ‘out of synchronisation’ problem. It has been reported that on some remotes a single 'Zero' for 3 seconds works better than 'Zero, Zero, Zero'.

===How do I remove Channel Duplicates?===

'''Background'''

If you have channel numbers between 800 and 899 they need to be removed. These channels are duplicates and have been allocated their 800+ number by the Humax. It has been reported that signals from duplicate channels can stop Accurate Recording from functioning correctly. Also the Humax does not always allocate the strongest signal channel first, this results in poor reception on the ‘Main’ channels and better reception on the unused 800’s channels.

'''Perform a Manual Re-Scan'''

Note:- The following procedure will remove your recording schedule (but not recordings) and also your Favourites list so make a note of them before carrying out a re-scan.

*Determine your strongest Local Freeview channel numbers by entering your postcode and selecting detailed view [http://www.digitaluk.co.uk/postcodechecker/ '''HERE''']
*Make a note of the 6 'Main' MUXs you need to keep (rejecting weaker signals)
*Start an auto. channel re-scan e.g. Menu >> Settings >> Installation >> Automatic Search
*Stop the auto. re-scan before any channels are found (This will clear all old channels)
*Using the Noted 6 Mux. Channel numbers perform a Manual channel scan e.g. Menu >> Settings >> Installation >> Manual Search
*NOTE Ensure that 'Network Search' is set to off
*The Hi Def. MUX requires the DVB-T2 transmission type all others require DVB-T
*You will now have all the TV channels contained within the 6 MUXs with no duplicates

===Which WiFi Dongle?===

There are a few to choose from including Humax's own, It has been reported that to work with the Humax, dongles must have the RALINK 3070 chipset.

NOTES
*It has been reported that channels 1 to 4 can't be used on with the Humax, this is due to configuration setting, they can be enabled by setting CountryRegion=31 in file/etc/Wireless/RT2870STA/RT2870STA.dat

* There is a list of Ralink 3070 devices [https://wikidevi.wi-cat.ru/index.php/Special:Ask?title=Special%3AAsk&q=%5B%5BChip1+model::~RT3070*%5D%5D&po=%3FInterface%0D%0A%3FForm+factor=FF%0D%0A%3FInterface+connector+type=USB+conn.%0D%0A%3FFCC+ID%0D%0A%3FManuf%0D%0A%3FManuf+product+model=Manuf.+mdl%0D%0A%3FVendor+ID%0D%0A%3FDevice+ID%0D%0A%3FChip1+model%0D%0A%3FSupported+802dot11+protocols=PHY+modes%0D%0A%3FMIMO+config%0D%0A%3FOUI%0D%0A%3FEstimated+year+of+release=Est.+year&eq=yes&p%5Bformat%5D=broadtable&order%5B0%5D=ASC&sort_num=&order_num=ASC&p%5Blimit%5D=200&p%5Boffset%5D=&p%5Blink%5D=all&p%5Bsort%5D=&p%5Bheaders%5D=show&p%5Bmainlabel%5D=&p%5Bintro%5D=&p%5Boutro%5D=&p%5Bsearchlabel%5D=%E2%80%A6+further+results&p%5Bdefault%5D=&p%5Bclass%5D=sortable+wikitable+smwtable '''HERE (Chip Used = RT3070) ''']. Caution, the items in this link have not been proved to work on the Humax.

While it won't be a lot of use to you deciding which dongle to purchase, custom firmware users can confirm whether a plugged-in dongle (working or not) is indeed 3070-based using a command on the Telnet or Webshell command line:

:<code>cat /proc/bus/usb/devices</code>

The output should be a series of lines of text, including something like this:

:<code>P: Vendor=148f ProdID=3070 Rev= 1.01</code>

If ProdID is not "3070", the dongle '''''will not work on HDR-FOX or HD-FOX'''''.

'''The following are reported to work on the Humax :-'''

*Ralink RT3070 150Mbps Mini USB 2.0 WiFi Wireless Network Card £5 inc. shipping from Ebay )
*Tenda W311u+ 150Mbps from Amazon
*Logilink WL0049A
*LG PW-DN427

*Manhattan ICI-524438 Intellinet Wireless 150N

'''The following have been reported as both working and not working SO BEWARE''' :-'''

*Trixes WiFi Wireless USB Adaptor Fast 150MBPS from Play.com
*Edimax - EW - 7711 Models 150MBPS (*** Some Models only See below)

'''The following are reported NOT to work on the Humax :-'''

*Edimax - EW - 7612
*Belkin - F5D8053 - N
*Texet - WA3070-06 - N
*Getnet - GN-621U aka Realtek RTL8191SU
*Netgear - WPN111GE
*Edimax - EW - 7711 Models 150MBPS (*** versions with Win8 logo on box are reported NOT to work with the Humax)
*Edimax - EW 7711UAN V2 (Version 2)

'''

===Will a Gigabit network speed up my Humax===

In a word, no. The Humax LAN is 10/100 baseT i.e. maximum 100 Mb/s. Although the Humax can be connected to a Gigabit switch such as the one [http://www.amazon.co.uk/gp/product/B000N99BBC?psc=1&redirect=true&ref_=oh_aui_detailpage_o08_s00 '''HERE'''], (also a router or hub), all traffic to and from the Humax will still be limited to 100 Mb/s maximum.

===How do I get the Humax to accept my Wi-Fi Password===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]

The standard 'On-TV-Screen' settings for your Humax's WiFi password is restricted to alpha-numerics only. This would require a user to change the Wi-Fi password used on all equipment connected to the router, in order to get the Humax to connect via Wi-Fi. However these settings can also be edited from the Web-If >> Settings >> Network Settings screen. In this screen both Ethernet and Wi-Fi settings can be edited and passwords / keywords can use any ASCII characters e.g. %#<> [SPACE] etc.

===How do I reset my Web-If Password===

If you have forgotten your Web-If password you can reset it by accessing the Humax [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet |'''Telnet''']] screen.

The [[Maintenance_Mode#Enter_Telnet_Menu|'''Telnet Menu''']] (Option 2) can do this. If the Telnet Menu is turned off enter :-

 tmenu 

or you can reset it by entering the following Telnet command line :-

 diag removepw 

===How do I restart the Web-If GUI?===

If you have a problem the Web-If Graphical User Interface, it can be re-started from Telnet as follows :-

 service stop lighttpd 

 service start lighttpd 

===How do I set the MTU on my Humax?===

If you get error messages like this "Resource temporarily unavailable. Error retrieving package list from the Internet. Please check your connection and try again." you may need to change your Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size in order to prevent packets being fragmented. If you need to fix the MTU on your humax, it can be achieved via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet |'''Telnet''']] as follows :-

* Create a start-up script called S22mtu and place it in the /mod/etc/init.d folder

 echo ifconfig eth0 mtu 1400 > /mod/etc/init.d/S22mtu 

* Change the permissions on this new script to allow it to be executed

 chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S22mtu 

* The new script will now auto-run each time the Humax is booted and will set MTU = 1400

Check for notification of any fragmentation during transmission of a given packet size by using ping, e.g. :-

 ping x.x.x.x -s 1500 . . . from a Humax command prompt or

 ping x.x.x.x -l 1500 . . . from a windows cmd prompt

 ping x.x.x.x -l 3000 -f . . . also from a windows cmd prompt

===How do I view 2.35:1 Content?===

settings > preferences > video > change screen ratio to 4:3 and display format to letterbox 16:9

===Why is my Humax Half Awake?===

'''The Humax can be in 3 distinct powered states, they are :-'''

# Standby = hard disk not spinning, No TV output, DLNA Server inactive, LAN inactive, No USB power
# Half Awake = hard disk spinning, No TV output, DLNA Server inactive, LAN active, USB power on
# Awake = hard disk spinning, TV output, DLNA Server running, LAN active, USB power

'''The Humax is expected to be in the Half awake state while :-'''

*Recording from standby
*Waiting to record from standby (15 Minutes)
*Looking for OTA updates at 4:30am daily
*Immediately after initial power on

'''The Humax can also unexpectedly enter the half awake state due to :-
'''
*Setting an Auto Off timer without a matching Auto On timer
*The presence of corrupted recordings sometimes with move/copy options greyed out
*The [[Fixes_/_Work_Arounds_for_Known_Bugs#Humax_is_permanently_Deleting|'''*Deleting''']] message being permanently displayed

'''Notes'''
#Enabling humaxtv debugging by running debugtv in Web-If >> Diagnostics will create a humaxtv.log file. Examining this file with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log File >> humaxtv.log while trying to place the Humax in standby can produce an error message showing why the Humax can't enter standby mode
# If the Redring package is installed, a dim blue front 'ring' colour is sometimes indicated in error even though the unit is actually in stand-by. It is possible to determine this by checking the 3 distinct powered states above

===How Do I Test My HDD?===

Humax has built a Hard Disk Drive test routine into version 1.02.28 of its software. This routine will only test the internal Hard disk of the HDR and is initiated as follows :- Menu >> Settings >> System >> Data Storage >> HDD Test. Also Custom Firmware 2.12 has a built-in HDD utility called Fix-Disk See Notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Fix-disk|'''HERE''']]

===What format should be used for a USB HDD===

If you want to use a USB Hard disk drive on your Humax, there are several formats that can be used. However there is no perfect solution because they all have pros and cons that need to be considered e.g. :-

{| border="1"
|-
! width="100"| Format
! width="250"|Pros
!width="250"|Cons
|-
| Fat32
|Both humax and PC will read/write
|There is a 4GB Maximum file size
|-
|NTFS
|No 4GB file limit
|Humax will read but not write (Note 1)
|-
|EXT3 (Note 2)
|Humax will read/write with no file limit
|A PC won't read/write from default (Note 3)
|-
|exFAT
|N/A (See Cons)
|Not supported by Humax (Note 4)
|}

Notes :-
#The custom Firmware can add NTFS reading to the Humax [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#NTFS_3g|'''Link Here''']]
#USB Flash drives should not be formatted in EXT3 (Use EXT2 instead)
#A PC can read EXT3/EXT2 with an extra program [http://www.ext2fsd.com/?page_id=16** '''(Link Here)''']
#Support for the ExFAT format can added using the Custom firmware package [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Exfat_Builder | '''ExFAT Builder''']]
#The Humax will format a USB hard disk for you (EXT3 is the only option)
#A USB drive used for software upgrade MUST be formatted in FAT32
#When the HD-Fox T2 uses USB flash with Custom Firmware it MUST be formatted in EXT2
#Flash drives below 32GB can't be used by the Humax for recording

===How do I convert a drive to EXT2?===

If you are using a USB Flash device to record to (HD-FOX T2 only >32GB) or as a backup device, the Humax will only use EXT3 as a format mode. Due to journalling, it is recommended that a Flash device be converted to the EXT2 format to prolong its life. Here is the procedure to use after a Humax format. NOTE :- tune2fs is part of the Custom Firmware package [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#E2fs_Progs|'''E2fs_Progs''']] and is also built-in to Custom Firmware Version 2.12 and later.

Telnet into the Humax [[Maintenance_Mode#Enter_Telnet_Menu|'''(Notes Here)''']] and select option 1 i.e. Restart into maintenance mode from the Telnet menu. If the Telnet menu is not displayed, create the maintenance.boot file (details below) :-

<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/maintenance.boot
reboot
</pre>
If it is an HD then presumably the disk will be /dev/sda but it is best to make sure using Fdisk. This should show the size of the disk and the available partitions e.g. for an 8GB USB Flash device

<pre>
fdisk -l /dev/sda

Disk /dev/sda: 8004 MB, 8004304896 bytes
35 heads, 21 sectors/track, 21269 cylinders
Units = cylinders of 735 * 512 = 376320 bytes

Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System
/dev/sda1 1 21270 7816688 83 Linux
</pre>
Unmount the partition if already mounted with :-
<pre>
umount /dev/sda1
</pre>
convert from ext3 to ext2 with :-
<pre>
tune2fs -O ^has_journal /dev/sda1
</pre>
or convert from ext2 to ext3 with :-
<pre>
tune2fs -j /dev/sda1
</pre>
When finished type 'reboot'.

===What Hardware / Software clashes with the Humax?===

Below is a list of Hardware / Software known to cause problems with the Humax in some way

{| border="1"
|-
! width="200"| Hardware / Software
! width="400"|Problem Details
|-
| Twonky Ver 7 (Ver.6 is OK.)
| A network conflict when Content Share = on causes constant reboot
|-
|Cyberlink PowerDVD Ver. 11 & 12
| A network conflict when Content Share = on causes constant reboot
|-
|PS3 Media Server (Windows)
| A network conflict when Content Share = on causes constant reboot
|}

'''NOTE:- ''' A workaround to prevent your Humax being affected by a NAS running Twonky Ver.7, is to create a file called /mod/etc/init.d/S22nasroute that contains, the following two lines, the IP address used must be the IP address of your NAS running Twonky Ver. 7

<pre> #!/bin/sh

route add -host 192.168.1.1 reject
</pre>

You must also make the new file executable by sending this command line :- chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S22nasroute

===How do I format HDD when it is 'Too Large'===

When you get the message Cannot Format - Capacity too large, it is best to put the box into RMA mode if you're planning to format the disk. That stops the CFW from starting anything up that might stop the disk from being unmounted. Once re-formatted, you can drop out of RMA via the telnet menu and then re-install.
Reverting to standard firmware may also work

===Why has my Humax's IP address changed?===

Your Humax's IP address in Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Configure LAN can change for several reasons depending on whether it is setup for DHCP or Manual operation. In DHCP mode you can expect the last set of digits to be allocated by your router over a certain range, so if your router is set to 192.168.123.xxx, any address in the range 192.168.123.001 to 192.168.123.254 can be expected, A failed DHCP allocation can result in an IP in the range 169.254.x.x being allocated. In Manual mode you would not expect your Humax's IP address to change, however if an unexpected address starting with 192.2.x.x is displayed the Humax has reset to factory default for some reason

===Which DNS server should I be using?===

There are several places on the internet that provide DNS look-up services, however users have reported 8.8.8.8 causes problems on the Humax, 208.67.222.222 has been reported to be more reliable

===Why are sidecar files missing after a copy===

Accompanying the main TS video file on the Humax are a group of small ancillary files referred to as 'sidecar' files, these files carry extra data that the Humax uses for Thumbnail pictures, bookmarks etc. When recordings are copied using the remote control, the sidecar files (i.e. hmt, thm and nts) should also be copied if they exist. Before the Humax copies the TS file it checks there is sufficient free space in the destination drive. After copying the TS file, another check is carried but this will fail and the sidecar files won't be copied if the free space is smaller than the TS file, even though the sidecar files are very much smaller than the TS file.

===Why does File Type xyz not appear in the Web-If===

By default only certain file types are displayed in the Web-If, for example to add m4v files, edit the /mod/webif/html/browse/index.jim 'set include' line as follows :-

<pre>
set include {.ts .avi .mpg .mpeg .wmv .mkv .mp3 .mp4 .mov .hmt .m4v}
</pre>

===Where can I get spare parts for my Humax?===

Try Humax customer service on 0344 318 8800

===How Can I fix / Get around problem XYZ?===

You could have a look at our [[Fixes_/_Work_Arounds_for_Known_Bugs|Fixes & Work Arounds Page]]

===Still no luck. Where can I ask for help?===

Visit the [http://hummy.tv hummy.tv forums] for more help. They're a friendly bunch!

Schedchk

2021-01-13T22:31:33Z

Black Hole: /* Progress Messages */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify -noAuto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files'', or in auto.log if schedchk is run as an auto-process.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noInplace option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files'', or auto.log if schedchk is run as an auto-process.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T22:30:36Z

Black Hole: /* No Alerts */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify -noAuto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files'', or in auto.log if schedchk is run as an auto-process.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noInplace option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2021-01-13T11:07:35Z

Black Hole: /* EPG */

'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}

Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]

==7Zip==

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.

==Android-Remote==
[[File:h-rem1.png|100px|thumb|right]]
[[File:h-rem2.png|100px|thumb|left]]

This is a remote-control app for the Humax HDR Fox-T2 digital video
recorder and for no other device. It must:
(1) have the Customized firmware (https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Custom_Firmware_Overview)
(2) the "ir" package.
(3) and be connected to the same home network as the phone/tablet.

Version 2 of this App. adds provision for multiple Humaxs and the option for 1 or 2 screens depending on screen size

==Arbookmarks==

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

==At==

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']

==Auto Schedule Restore==

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

'''NOTES:-'''
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-
*Auto-Unprotect does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.

==Badnts==

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
'''Notes'''
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed

==Bash==

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']] Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

==Blocklist==

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].

==Bookmark==

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed

==BootHDR==

<big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') 

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]

==Boot_Settings==

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]

==Bsed==

Binary-safe search/replace utility.

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==cfupdater==

A flash update script for updating the custom firmware on an HDR without using USB sticks, It should be run in maintenance mode and does not currently support updating the loader.

Once the package has been installed, copy the hdf file onto the hard disk (or make it available in maintenance mode), then reboot into maintenance mode and send a command line in the form :-

<pre>
/mod/sbin/cfupdater <hdf-file>
</pre>

If you need remote progress, then you can telnet back into the box after the connection has closed then
<pre> tail -f /tmp/cfupdate.log
</pre>

==Channeldel==

Note: now superseded by tunefix

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later

==ChaseDecrypt==

Retrieve and decrypt recording whilst recording is still in progress, uses Chaseget

See [[ChaseDecrypt]] for further details

==Chaseget==

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==CLI==

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#

==Content Sharing==

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content

==Crashdiag==

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it

==Crash Log==

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
</pre>

==Cron==

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

<pre>
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

</pre>

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run
#at 2AM every day
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
#every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

 crontab -l 

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line

==Cryptokey==

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-

<pre>
humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>
</pre>

The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax

==Curl Command==

curl command line utility.

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==DB Update==

General boot-time database update utility

==Dedup (Command Line)==
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Dedup (Series Helper File)==

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

<pre>
Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
</pre>

The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']

==DeRMA==

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message

==Detectads==

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package

==Disable DSO==

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

==Disable OTA==

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however if this is done there is a small possibility that an OTA search may still be actioned on your Humax

'''Note''' The OTA service for software updates is no longer in operation

==Display==

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will be displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

 /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' 

The display can be blanked with :-

 /sbin/display ' ' 

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

 /sbin/display '$he:lp' 

'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

==DLNA-Filter==

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

'''NOTES'''
*DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank

==DLNA-Servername==

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed

==Dropbear SSH==

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys

==Dropbear SFTP==

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']

==DUMA==

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.

==Dustbin==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Undelete | '''Undelete''']]

==Dvbsnoop==

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.

==E2fs_Progs==

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].

==[Eject]==
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-

*USB interface name
*USB Device name
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
*Device % used
*Device capacity
*Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

'''NOTES'''
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

==EPG==

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

When using the ''epg'' command on HD-FOX, note that:
# There is no EPG cache file to inspect unless there is a recording drive fitted;
# To access the cache, use ''epg -f /media/drive1/epgsavedata''.

==Epgfix==

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date when the Humax is on 24/7, (it has no advantage when the unit has a daily on/standby cycle).

You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Epgpatch==

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview

==Enable Telnet==

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

<pre>
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
</pre>

==Exfat==

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT

==Exfat Builder==

'''See Exfat above'''

[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.

==EXTRA.css==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]

==Fan==

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

'''Notes'''

*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run

<pre>
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
</pre>

==Ffmpeg==

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3

Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']

==Fix-disk==

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]

==Fix-disk (USB)==

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].

==Fix Flash Packages ==

If previously installed fix-flash-packages will re-install :- boot-settings, crashdiag, dbupdate, disable-dso, disable-ota, dlna-servername, ir, fan, fix-disk, multienv, multimode, newk, nugget, opkg-beta, poweron-channel, redring, rsvsync, tmenu, tunefix, tweak, undelete, virtual-disk2, webif, webshell

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

'''NOTES'''
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==Flatview==

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

'''NOTES'''

*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

'''Exceptions'''

*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

==Flexget==

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

 */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron 

* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']

==Flexview==

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]

==Forcedate==

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].

==Foscam==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
* login = humaxftp
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==Foxlink==

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]

==Fuse==

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.

==Genre Icons==

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]

==Git==

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.

==Grep==

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

<pre>
humax# cat original-file.txt

-H Add 'filename:' prefix
-h Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-q Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v Select non-matching lines
-s Suppress open and read errors
-r Recurse
-i Ignore case
-w Match whole words only
-F PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N Match up to N times per file
-A N Print N lines of trailing context
-B N Print N lines of leading context
-C N Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-v Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#
</pre>

==Gnu Fdisk==

GNU fdisk.

==Hdparm==

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.

==HMT==

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

'''hmt Options List'''
<pre>
humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
Commands:
+/-new Mark/unmark recording as new.
+/-lock Mark/unmark recording as locked.
+/-guidance Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
+/-protect Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
+/-encrypted Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
+/-shrunk Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
+/-dedup Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
+/-detectads Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
-p Display parseable file information (see *).
-list Display file information (default).
-bookmarks Display bookmarks.
+addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+clearbookmarks
+settitle=<new title>
+setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
+setguidance=<new guidance>
+setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
+setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
+setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
+setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
+patch8=offset:value patch 8-bit value
+patch16=offset:value patch 16-bit value
+patch32=offset:value patch 32-bit value
Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
+read8=offset read 8-bit value
+read16=offset read 16-bit value
+read32=offset read 32-bit value
Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
Resume point, Status/Reason.

</pre>

'''Notes'''
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

==hmt-linux==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)

==hmt-solaris==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)

==Hrwconv==

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

==HTTPS==

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On

==Humaxrw==

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.

<pre>
humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
-d <list> delete recordings
-g <list> get recordings to current directory
-h help (this text)
-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
-u <list> unprotect recordings
-v version
-x extended listing for humaxdiag
-w pause at the end waiting for a keypress
-y answer yes to all prompts

Advanced Options
-D Delete time shift recording buffers
-E Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
-H <list> get hre files for recordings
-M <n> modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
-O <n> offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
-V <n> modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
-Z Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from source Humax disk
and copy to destination Humax disk
-g <list> get recordings from source disk
and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-n no info - use if corruption is really bad
-g <list> get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
<pre>
humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
-C Skip checksum validation.
-c <arguments> Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
-d<level> Enable debugging at level.
-l Show contents of HDF file (default).
-o Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
-r Don't compress blocks when creating.
-S<section> Extract only the numbered section.
-t Test archive (validate checksums).
-x Extract files.
-s Also show/extract member checksums.

Examples:

View HDF: humidify file.hdf
Test HDF: humidify -t file.hdf
Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
Create HDF: humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)

</pre>

A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
It contains the following files:-

[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]

==Hwctl==

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !

==Id3v2==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].

Available commands:

<pre>
-h, --help Display this help and exit
-f, --list-frames Display all possible frames for id3v2
-L, --list-genres Lists all id3v1 genres
-v, --version Display version information and exit
-l, --list Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
-R, --list-rfc822 Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
-d, --delete-v2 Deletes id3v2 tags
-s, --delete-v1 Deletes id3v1 tags
-D, --delete-all Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
-C, --convert Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
-1, --id3v1-only Writes only id3v1 tag
-2, --id3v2-only Writes only id3v2 tag
-a, --artist "ARTIST" Set the artist information
-A, --album "ALBUM" Set the album title information
-t, --song "SONG" Set the song title information
-c, --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
Set the comment information (both
description and language optional)
-g, --genre num Set the genre number
-y, --year num Set the year
-T, --track num/num Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
</pre>

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

==In Use==

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].

==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.

==Jpnevulator==

Serial Port Sniffer.

==Joe==

Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].

==Kernels==

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support

==Lighttpd==

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/ '''HERE''']

==LDD==

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line

==Libpcre==

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library

==Libunwind==

Utility used with the Crashdiag package

==LibParted==

Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package

==Libsndfile==

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.

==Loaders==

{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}

The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']

==M4==

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']

==Maintenance Mode==

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]

==Mediatomb==
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']

==Mongoose==

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.

==Multienv==

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.

==Multi-mode==

[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]

==Mvdisks==

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

'''Notes'''

#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
''' DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. '''

To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
#reboot the Humax
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder

==Nano==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==New Portal==

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]

==Newk==

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package

==Nicesplice==

A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]

==Nsplice==

Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==NTFS Progs==

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS

==Ntp Client==

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']

==Nugget==

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

<pre>
nugget <command>
ping - Test nugget connectivity.
status - Show nugget status and version.
schedule.load - Load recording schedule from disk.
schedule.save - Save recording schedule to disk.
schedule.slot - Update timers for schedule slot.
schedule.db - sqlite3 database handle info.
schedule.epg - Display EPG information for slot.
schedule.timers - Show internal timers.
cryptokey - Set or display encryption key.
</pre>

==OPKG==

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg download auto-unprotect HID= download current version of a remote package (Version number not allowed)

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

 opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

 opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants

==Opkg-beta==

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen

==Parted==

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]

==Popol==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]

<pre>

-s, --songname set songname
-a, --artist set artist
-l, --album set album
-c, --comment set comment
-y, --year set release year
-t, --tracknum set track number

</pre>

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Portal Xtra1==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Poweron-Channel==

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings

*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None

*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)

'''NOTES'''
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
<pre>
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1

</pre>

==Procps==

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Python==

A package that adds the Python programming language

==Python Setuptools==

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]

==Qtube==

Simple webif to queue youtube downloads to run in the Auto process queue, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Youtube-dl | '''Youtube-dl''']]

==Recmon==

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.

Examples
<pre>
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
</pre>

==Rc app bridge==

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

'''Notes'''
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled

==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option

==Redring ==

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

{| border="1"
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
! width="250"| Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
! 11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
! Scrolling On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Clock
! Clock Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Blue Brightness

Red Brightness
! Fixed
100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable

Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%

0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Amber Brightness
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11%
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

 HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

'''Notes'''

*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

==Renumber==
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

'''Notes'''

*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package

==Reset Webif==

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==

Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Mobile==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==rs==

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

Options:
-d[level] Set debug level.
-D<seconds> Sleep for random(seconds).
-h Show help text.
-i Show detected machine info.
-q Be more quiet.

Commands:
register <email> Register this device.
push Push scheduled events.
cmd Retrieve next queued command.
ack <id> Acknowledge command <id>.
status Show device registration status.
log <msg> Send log message to server.
epg Distributed EPG management.

</pre>

==rs time==

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time

==RMA==

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

'''Notes'''
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page

==Rsvsync==

Boot-time reservation sync service

==Rsync==

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

 rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup 

This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ 

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ 

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ 

[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html '''More Info.''']

==rt3070==

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware

==Safe Mode==

Safe Mode is a package loaded onto the Humax via USB in the same way as a software upgrade, it temporarily switches off most Custom Firmware components (apart from a small web server that allows you to get back out of safe more when you want), there is a package called enablesafemode.spk to turn this feature on and another called disablesafemode.spk to turn it back off, they are available frrom the [[Firmware_Downloads | '''Firmware Download page''']]

'''Note''' if you have altered the encryption keys on your humax that any recordings made in safe mode will be made using the standard encryption and won't be, automatically, viewable when you return to normal mode.

==Samba==

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

'''Tips'''

#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

==Schedchk==

Check scheduled recordings against EPG and reschedule, if possible, entries that don't match the EPG

See the [[Schedchk|user guide]] for further details

==Scons==

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software

==Screensaver==

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-

{| border="1"
|-
!3X5
>>>
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
!Neon
>>>
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
!Avatar
>>>
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]
|-
! 7Seg
>>>
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
! Neon-Blue
>>>
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
!Wedge
>>>
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
|-
! Dot
>>>
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
! Agen
>>>
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
!Cursor
>>>
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
|-
! VFD
>>>
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
! Glass-Blue
>>>
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
!Maze
>>>
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
|}

'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server

''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

<pre>
humax# screensaver
1: 3X5
2: 7Seg
3: Black
4: Cursor
5: Humax Default
6: Neon
7: Neon-Blue
8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
'''NOTES:-'''
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default

==Sed==

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']

==Series Filer==

'''NOTE'''

'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

'''NOTE:-'''

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==Sh (SHell)==

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language

==Sidecar==

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files

Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

Command line options :-
<pre>
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

-n : Create new .nts file
-h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
-x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
-c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
-t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
-p : Display progress bar
-i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.

humax#
</pre>

'''NOTES'''
# The Sidecar package must be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
# TS files must be decrypted before running Sidecar, If the TS is encrypted see note 5 below
#Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application may not be compatible
#There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''Here''']]
# if the ts file is encrypted, the package will create dummy hmt and nts files to allow the file to be decrypted i.e :-
*Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
*Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
*When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
*There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
*Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings

==Smartmontools==

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A 

or

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
<pre>

humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME FLAG VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE UPDATED WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate 0x000f 114 099 006 Pre-fail Always - 66811863
3 Spin_Up_Time 0x0003 097 097 000 Pre-fail Always - 0
4 Start_Stop_Count 0x0032 098 098 020 Old_age Always - 2878
5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct 0x0033 100 100 036 Pre-fail Always - 0
7 Seek_Error_Rate 0x000f 078 060 030 Pre-fail Always - 70502101
9 Power_On_Hours 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3294
10 Spin_Retry_Count 0x0013 100 100 097 Pre-fail Always - 0
12 Power_Cycle_Count 0x0032 099 099 020 Old_age Always - 1439
184 End-to-End_Error 0x0032 100 100 099 Old_age Always - 0
187 Reported_Uncorrect 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3
188 Command_Timeout 0x0032 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
189 High_Fly_Writes 0x003a 093 093 000 Old_age Always - 7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022 055 044 045 Old_age Always In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius 0x0022 045 056 000 Old_age Always - 45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered 0x001a 048 039 000 Old_age Always - 66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector 0x0012 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable 0x0010 100 100 000 Old_age Offline - 0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count 0x003e 200 200 000 Old_age Always - 0
</pre>

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda

==SQLite3==

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)

==SRT==

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

'''Notes'''

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/ '''HERE''']

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail

==Status==

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
</pre>
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen

==Strace==

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.

==Stripts==
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

<pre>
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
-a Analyse an input file.
-A Quickly analyse an input file.
-c Check if there are any EIT packets.
-C Show address of first EIT packet.
-D Dump NTS file.
-E Check if file is encrypted.
-f Also fix PAT packets.
-F Only fix PAT packets.
-T Dump TS file.
-v Verbose.
-X Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
-Z Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
-z Analyse entire TS file.
-@ <key> Decrypt recording with <key>.
-/ <key> Check encryption key against recording.
-d [level] Increase debug level or set debug level.
</pre>

 stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

 stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

 stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

 stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

'''NOTE'''
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

<pre>
stripts -@@ <input> <output>

stripts -@ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name" "output file name"

stripts -/ 000378bd11f336333731303434393630 "input file name"
Encryption key is correct for this recording.
</pre>

1) In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the resident Humax encryption key

2) The Second example above is used when the decryption is being carried out on a file recorded on a different Humax unit, this unit's encryption key must be entered, e.g :- for a MAC address of 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 and a serial number of 6371044960-1234, enter 000378bd11f3 followed by the first 10 digits of the serial number in hexidecimal e.g. 36333731303434393630

3) The third example above uses -/ to Check the encryption key against a recording

"input file name" and "output file name" are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts (Quotes are required for name with spaces)

There are versions of stripts that can perform offline decryption on various computer platforms including :- Linux, MacOSX and Windows etc., (NOTE :- The Windows version also requires cygwin1.dll) [https://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities '''See Link HERE''']

==Swapper==

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

==Sweeper==

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

'''Command Line operation'''

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor

Example 1)

 action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

 action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

 lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

 action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

 action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

 folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

 folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-
*lines starting with '#' are comments
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

<pre>
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
</pre>

==Subtitles==
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]

==Swifi==

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi

==Sysmon==
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

*Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

*CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

*Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic

==System Flush==

The System Flush Update File is a package that is installed in the same way as a firmware update to perform a full system flush and reset, it reformats the areas of flash used for persistent data like the schedule, there are two of these flash areas and they use the JFFS2 filesystem.

The package is designed to assist recovery from crash/reboot loops.Your recordings will not be affected.'NB: This will also clear most CFW package settings.

==TCL Check==

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files

==Tcpfix==

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses

==TCP Ping==

Simple TCP ping utility.

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See ''' RED ''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al 

<pre>
C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>
</pre>

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*''' [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' '''
*''' [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf '''
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details

==Telnet Commands==

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
* cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
* cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
* pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
* ls -al = list contents of the current directory
* touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory

==Tempmon==

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C

==Text Editors==

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]

==Tmenu==

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
<pre>
Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

/-------------------------\
| T E L N E T M E N U |
\-------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
2 - Remove web interface password.
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
x - Exit and close connection.
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option:

</pre>

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings

==Tnftp==

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

 transmission-remote 

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
*When highlighted select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

===Blocklist===

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

'''Notes'''
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.

==Transportx==

This package enhances the transport function of the Humax after installing (and a system re-boot), the pause button gains a new function, after the initial pause further presses of this button will step the paused image forward by a single frame (approx. 1/25 second), press play to resume normal viewing

After the SLOW button is pressed, the following functions are also available :-

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/4 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/8 fwd
*Ffwd button: x1/16 fwd

*Slow button: x1/2 fwd
*Rew button: x1 rew
*Rew button: x1/2 rew *
*Rew button: x1/4 rew
*Rew button: x1/8 rew *

Press play to exit

* It has been reported that these options may not be available

==Trm==

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==TSTools==

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]

==TTYSnoop==

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.

==Tunefix==
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN

'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

==Tunefix Update==

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.

==TV Diary==

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]

==Uinput==

User-space input kernel module

==Unencrypt==

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
* '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' 

*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
<pre>
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
</pre>

*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

*Dustbin Name
*Remove files from dustbin after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 days
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

==Version==

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
<pre>
humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
Web interface version: 1.2.1
Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#
</pre>

==Vfdtest==
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

 vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

 vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off

==Vi==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).

==Vim Basic==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Vim Standard==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''

==Virtual-Disk2==

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Backup/Restore Schedule===
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

===Change Channel===

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

===Change Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Create Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Delete===

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on

===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Detect Adverts===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

===Disable AR===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Enable Auto-Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

===Enable Auto-Dedup===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])

===Enable Auto-Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])

===Enable Auto Expire===
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first

===Bookmarks===
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

===Enable Auto-MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
===Enable Auto-Shrink===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])

===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" 

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

===Extract To MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
*The equivalent command line would be:-
<pre>
ffmpeg -y -benchmark -v 0 -i <ts file> -map 0:0 -map 0:1 -vcodec copy -acodec copy <mpg file>
</pre>

===Enable Auto-mpg===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

===File Editor===

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

===Lock===

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

===Mark as Watched===

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

===Manual Event===
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
*Create : Recording or Reminder
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
*Channel : Number / Name
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

===Multi Mode Recording===

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]

===Network Settings===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
'''Notes'''
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

===New Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]

===Play===

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

===Rename (File)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

*New Filename
*New Medialist Title
*New Synopsis
*New Guidance Text
*New Genre

===Rename (Folder)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

===Reset New Flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

===Save Last Streamed Content===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

===Set Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

'''Notes'''
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

===Sidecar Files===

see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]

===Split===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

===Shrink (stripts)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

===Sweeper Rules===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

===Toggle no-sweep flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

===View Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture

==Web-IF Channel Icons==

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels

==Webif-Charts==

Chart modules for the web interface

==Webif-iphone==

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==Webif Style Sheet==

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
<pre>
img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
</pre>

Change the size of the pie chart:-

<pre>
#tbdiskpie
{
width: 100px;
height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
top: 7px !important;
}
</pre>

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
<pre>
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
</pre>

Change font colour or size :-
<pre>
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
</pre>

Change Icon size
<pre>
img.button { height: 50px; }
</pre>

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

<pre>
#toTop, #toTopHover
{
background: transparent !important;
display: none !important;
opacity: 100 !important;
}
</pre>

Remove EPG ENC icons

<pre>
img.epgenc { display: none; }
</pre>

==Webshell==

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access

==webm==

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
<pre>
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
</pre>

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

'''Notes:-'''
*There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version
*Both the Busybox and the current stand alone versions of wget (1.12) may fail on websites that demand newer versions of TLS/SSL than the ones supported

When attempting to download a Custom Firmware package specifying a version number, an error will be produced unless the -U option is used, eg :-
<pre>
wget -U "" http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/at_3.1.18_mipsel.opk
</pre>

The use of "opkg download" with a specifed version number will also fail

==Wireless Helper==

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle

==WOL==

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
<pre>
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
</pre>
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
<pre>
echo /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
</pre>
NOTES:-
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by

==Xtra1 Portal==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]

==Youtube-dl==

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV Hub etc., in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
</pre>

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code extension resolution note
249 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171 webm audio only DASH audio 6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140 m4a audio only DASH audio 145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278 webm 256x144 144p 34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242 webm 426x240 240p 44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160 mp4 256x144 144p 50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134 mp4 640x360 360p 74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243 webm 640x360 360p 78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133 mp4 426x240 240p 87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244 webm 854x480 480p 116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135 mp4 854x480 480p 117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136 mp4 1280x720 720p 191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247 webm 1280x720 720p 203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137 mp4 1920x1080 1080p 312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248 webm 1920x1080 1080p 357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271 webm 2560x1440 1440p 609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313 webm 3840x2160 2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17 3gp 176x144 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36 3gp 320x180 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43 webm 640x360 medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18 mp4 640x360 medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22 mp4 1280x720 hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
</pre>

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
</pre>

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option (Video MUST be the first item, e.g. 313)

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
</pre>

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme '''Github Notes''']

A list of websites claimed to be working for the Windows version of Youtube-DL is here :-

[https://rg3.github.io/youtube-dl/supportedsites.html '''Available Sites''']

'''Mainsteam sites Working on the Humax Version'''

Youtube, BBC Iplayer, ITV-Hub, dplay

'''Mainstream sites Not Working on the Humax Version'''

Channel4, My5, UKTVPlay

==Zeroconf==

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.

==Zip==

zip utilities for compressing files :-
<pre>
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
can include the special name - to compress standard input.
If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
-f freshen: only changed files -u update: only changed or new files
-d delete entries in zipfile -m move into zipfile (delete OS files)
-r recurse into directories -j junk (don't record) directory names
-0 store only -l convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
-1 compress faster -9 compress better
-q quiet operation -v verbose operation/print version info
-c add one-line comments -z add zipfile comment
-@ read names from stdin -o make zipfile as old as latest entry
-x exclude the following names -i include only the following names
-F fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D do not add directory entries
-A adjust self-extracting exe -J junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
-T test zipfile integrity -X eXclude eXtra file attributes
-y store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
-e encrypt -n don't compress these suffixes
</pre>

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:45:21Z

Black Hole: /* No Auto */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify -noAuto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noInplace option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:44:18Z

Black Hole: /* In-place updating */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noInplace option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:41:37Z

Black Hole: /* Progress Messages */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:41:00Z

Black Hole: /* Progress Messages */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of messages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

Messages are sent to a log file schedchk.log, which can be viewed via ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View log Files''.

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:38:21Z

Black Hole: /* No Alerts */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of mesages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:37:52Z

Black Hole: /* No Alerts */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the ''schedchk.log '' file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of mesages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:36:19Z

Black Hole: /* No Alerts */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the ''schedchk.log'' file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of mesages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Schedchk

2021-01-13T08:35:39Z

Black Hole: /* No Alerts */

= [[File:Schedchk48.png|left]]Schedchk - Check and fix the Humax recording schedule =
== Introduction ==
While it is "only telly" it can be extremely annoying when we find that a programme we had scheduled to record fails to record correctly.
Some failures can be attributed to user errors but a considerable numbers of problems are attributable to the broadcasters and problems in the Humax software not anticipating the ever more creative ways the broadcasters find to make life complicated!

The origins of schedchk go back several years to a [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/schedchk-auto-fix-schedule-changes-a-proposal.7988 forum post]where I proposed the idea of automatically detecting when programmes were delayed or moved to another channel (e.g. BBC One -> BBC Two) because of overrunning sporting events or breaking news events. Nothing much happened at that time since Wimbledon only last two weeks and other last minute programme changes are by their nature unpredictable making testing difficult.

However now we live in Interesting Times and the unpredictable has become routine, every day the BBC1 showing of Pointless is moved to BBC2 to make way for the Corona Virus Daily Update. One might think that after this long the BBC would take the hint and schedule Pointless on BBC2 but no they persist in scheduling it on BBC1 and only update the schedules 3-72 hours in advance!
Since Pointless is one of our favourite shows I was provoked into resurrecting the Schedchk idea and finally it is now ready for a wider audience though there may still be a few rough edges.

[[File:Schedchk-rts.png|400px|frameless|right]]

The program relies on the EPG being kept up-to-date to allow it to find alternative showings of programmes and, especially with last minute changes, that can't be relied upon and sometimes there are no alternate showings so it will not be infallible but hopefully it will help you avoid some missed recordings,

To allow schedchk to promptly update the recording schedule it is important that Real-time scheduling is enabled via the Advanced Settings section of the Settings page

I have found several different categories of potential errors in the schedule and these are listed below with examples of how they can occur and action schedchk takes when attempting to fix them.
__TOC__
== Schedule Check Categories ==
=== EPG changes ===
The most basic form of schedule change is when the broadcaster changes the start time, duration or scheduled episode (event-CRID change).
Usually the Humax is quite good at spotting these changes but sometimes it doesn't immediately.

Schedchk will resolve this type of error by updating the schedule entry with the new details.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noEPGchg option in settings or on the command line

=== Missing EPG entry ===
[[File:Schedchk-duplicateepisode.png|600px|frameless|right|Duplicate episode]]
Sometimes the event-id associated with a programme changes and the Humax is not good at resolving these, on occasion it can get very confused resulting in it scheduling two episodes of the same series at the same time!

Changes to the event-id can occur when a programme is moved another channel (e.g. Pointless moving from BBC1→2), when a programme is added to the schedule (ITV assigned new event-ids to all programmes following the Queen's recent broadcasts), a different episode is scheduled (e.g, the duplicate example above) or if a programme is cancelled and replaced by something else.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead.
If there are no matches by event-CRID it will look for a programme of the same name scheduled for the same time in case the Broadcaster has changed event-id, event-CRID and series-CRID and scheduled an episode from a different series of the programme.
If duplicate episodes occur it will delete the episode that no longer appears in the EPG.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noMissEPG option in settings or on the command line

=== Conflict resolution ===

Conflict arise when three of more programmes are scheduled to be recorded at the same time (Two or more on HD model).
This can arise if a user ignores conflict warnings when scheduling, when a news day's EPG data is loaded, or if the EPG changes.

Schedchk attempts to resolve this type of error by searching for another showing of the same programme (by event-CRID) elsewhere in the EPG and if another showing (that doesn't cause a conflict) can be found, it will schedule that showing instead. When considering alternatives schedchk will attempt to find a match on a channel with the same definition (HD or SD) as the original but if there is no match it will consider matches on channels with a different definition.

Schedchk is quite simple minded in its approach to conflict resolution and will not always choose the best solution for your viewing needs. For complex conflicts or where you want to select which programmes you don't want delayed you should attempt to manually resolve conflicts using the Visual Schedule displays in the webif or RS before schedchk attempts automatic resolution.

At the moment Split recordings are not considered for conflict resolution.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noConflict option in settings or on the command line

=== Unscheduled episodes ===

The Humax normally manges to automatically schedule new episodes of a series but can sometimes miss changes that happen in the middle of the scheduled sequence

Schedchk checks the EPG by series-CRID and adds any missing

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noUnsched option in settings or on the command line

=== series-CRID changes ===

Often broadcasters change the series-CRID of a long running programme causing the next episodes of the programme to be not recorded. Sometimes this is because it has switched to another series of the programme (as if we really care whether it is repeats from series 51 or 55) but other times there is no obvious reason for the change.

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a new series with matching name in the same time slot on the same channel and scheduling a new series recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes with variable time slots such as the F1 Grand Prix races
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the series-CRID check is liable to consider the +1 series a new unscheduled series

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSCRID option in settings or on the command line

=== One-off episodes of a series ===

Sometimes broadcasters schedule episodes of a series as 1-off programmes without a series-CRID. Often this is deliberate when filling in a gap in the schedule but other times it is the result of broadcaster incompetence! Recently, Pick broadcast several episodes of the Sherlock series as 1-off programmes 😥

Schedchk handles this by looking by programme name for a 1-off programme with matching name on the same channel and scheduling a recording for the programme.

Prefixes such as New: are ignored but the checking can miss some programmes and find false matches in other cases:
* Variations in title, Pointless would match Pointless Celebrities but not vice versa
* Programmes moved by conflict resolution, If, for example, an series episode has been moved to a +1 channel the 1-off check is liable to search the +1 channel

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -no1off option in settings or on the command line

=== Not Recording ===

Occasionally a programme fails to start recording. This can be due to an unresolved conflict, overrunning programmes, last minute schedule changes etc. but some failures are unexplained.

When a programme is due to be recording schedchk checks whether there is a file for the recording and whether it is growing in size. If the programme is not recording it searches by event-CRID for an alternative showing and, if a suitable alternate is found, schedules it as a 1-off recording.

Since some late starting is normal the checking starts a short while after the scheduled start. By default this is 300 seconds (5 minutes) but this can be modified by specifying the -recWait option in settings or on the command line

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noNotRec option in settings or on the command line

Note: Since active recording schedule entries are deleted on Humax start-up schedchk can't schedule alternates for recordings truncated by a power failure or Humax crash 😥.

=== Split Recordings ===

Split recordings are where a long programme such as a film has a shorter programme, often a news bulletin, in the middle of the longer programme. While they may appear to be a 2-episode series they are not treated as such by the broadcasters or the Humax and have their own (very badly designed) set of rules which the Humax only partially implements.
Split recordings contain #number at the end of their event-CRID (eg /X4454865#01) and both halves of the split recording are required to have the same number, known as an IMI (Instance Metadata ID). The problem arises when the same film is repeated later in the week with exactly the same event-CRID and IMI, under the rules if there is more than three hours between them they should be treated as different programmes but the Humax treats them all as additional parts of the same programme.

This is a particular problem on channels such as Sony Movies which split most films into 2 parts and regularly repeat films up to three times a week. So you can attempt to schedule just one showing of a film but the Humax will schedule all six parts and some of the unwanted recordings can cause schedule conflicts.

Schedchk handles split recordings by leaving those with one or two parts schedule alone, if there are more than two parts scheduled it checks whether there is more than a 3-hour gap and whether there are any conflicts. The first, non-conflicting, showing is kept with a dummy IMI to prevent the Humax rescheduling and the other showings are removed from the schedule.

Checking for this type of problem can be by-passed by specifying the -noSplit option in settings or on the command line

== Other controls ==

=== Threshold ===

The Threshold setting (-thresh) controls how far into the schedule schedchk should look for problems. The default, unless changed in settings, is 36 hours which seems adequate for resolving potential problems.

You may wish to increase it on infrequently used machines.

=== No Auto ===

Normally schedchk runs as part of the regular Auto processing.
If you would prefer to run it on ad-hoc basis from a command line or set up your own [[Schedchk#Running via crontabs|schedule with crontabs]] you can specify No Auto in the Schedchk section of the settings page.

=== No Alerts ===

Schedchk generates webif warnings when it makes changes to the recording schedule to let you know what has happened.
[[File:Schedchk-alert.png|frame|center|Alert messages]]
If you would prefer not to receive these pop-up messages you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line. Messages (whether or not alerts are enabled) can be viewed in the schedchk.log file using the WebIF log file viewer ''WebIF >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files''.

Note: The example shows that sometimes broadcasters makes changes and then reverse them in short order.

=== Test Mode ===

If you specify the -test option no schedule changes will actually be made

=== In-place updating ===

If you use the visual schedule webif/RS pages to "Record this showing instead" it will generate a skip entry for the current episode and a one-off recording entry for the replacement episode. Schedchk uses a different approach and where possible updates the existing series entry with the new episode details.

The main advantages of this approach is that the recording will automatically go into the series folder and any folder related webif settings (auto-decrypt, shrink, detectads etc) will be applied as usual. You will only have one entry in the recording schedule rather than many and you won't have to move recordings from the My Videos folder.

[[File:Schedchk-inplace.png|800px||right]]
[[File:Schedchk-inplace2.png|800px||right]]
It can look a bit odd to have episodes from different channels in the same series but both webif and RS handle this correctly

Which of the channels will show as the 'main' channel for the series depends on the channel of the next scheduled episode

Minor disadvantages are:
* The Humax won't add new episodes while the 'wrong' channel is main (but Schedchk 'Unscheduled episodes' will add them instead)
* Schedchk 'SCRID change' and '1-off episodes' will check the alternate channel when it is main (more work needs to be done in this area)

If you would prefer more traditional skip and 1-off scheduling you can specify the -noAlert option in settings or on the command line.

=== Progress Messages ===

The -d option controls the level of mesages produced:
* 0 - Schedule changes and errors only (also displayed as webif notifications)
* 1 - Intermediate level
* 2 - Detailed progress messages

== Schedchk settings ==

Initially all schedchk processing options are enabled but the default settings can be overridden on the webif Settings page, any changes made here become the new defaults for schedchk.

More detail on each of the options is given in the sections above.

[[File:Schedchk-settingspage.png|frame|center|SchedChk Settings Page ]]

== Schedchk command line ==

As well as running automatically every few minutes as part of the regular Auto process you can also run schedchk on demand from a command line. Options specified on the command line override values set on the settings page for this invocation of schedchk only, they don't change the default values.

<pre>
schedchk = Check for recording schedule issues and attempt to fix them

schedchk -h = produce this help
schedchk -rsv = scan the recording schedule

Options Default (unless changed in Settings)
-thresh 36 = Don't check for problems more than x hrs away from start
-d 0 = Produce more detailed output
-test n = Don't make updates
-noAuto n = Don't run regularly as part of Auto-Processing
-noAlert n = Don't generate webif alert messages for changes made
-noConflict n = Don't check for conflicts
-noUnsched n = Don't check for episodes missing from schedule
-noSCRID n = Don't check for series CRID changes
-no1off n = Don't check for episodes scheduled as one off programmes
-noNotRec n = Don't check for failures to record
-recWait 300 = Don't assume recording failed until x seconds late starting
-noMissEPG n = Don't resolve missing epg entries
-noEPGchg n = Don't resolve epg time/ duration/ event crid changes
-noSplit n = Don't resolve repeated split recordings
-noInplace n = Update reservation by skipping & 1-off rather than inplace

Note: Options are not case sensitive
</pre>
-noAuto has no effect when specified as a command option, it needs to be set via the settings page.

== Running via crontabs ==

As an alternative to running schedchk as part of the standard customised firmware Auto processing it also possible to schedule schedchk to run at different intervals using the crontabs file.

You might want to do this if:
* You normally disable Auto processing during recordings but would still like to take advantage of Not Recording checks
* You want some checks made at a different frequency from others
* You want process messages written to a dedicated log file

You can edit the crontabs file via webif→Diag→File Editor→Commonly edited files→/mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root
[[File:Schedchk-crontabs.png|frame|center|Editing crontabs file]]
In the example above schedchk will run a Not Recording check every 4 minutes and check for SCRID changes and 1-off recordings every 4 hours at 17 minutes past the hour, output will be written to schedchk.log

[https://www.thegeekstuff.com/2009/06/15-practical-crontab-examples/ Guides to crontabs time formats are available online]

== fmtrsv - Format a rsv.db table entry ==
Fmtrsv is a simple command line utility created to help with displaying the contents of the rsv.db where schedule entries are stored. It is included with the schedchk package to help in gathering information for debugging purposes. Entries displayed can be filtered with a number of options
<pre>
# fmtrsv -h
fmtrsv = Formats schedule entries from the rsv.db

fmtrsv options
no options will list all reservations

Options
-h produce this help
-n,-name xxx = select recording name contains
-s,-slot n = select slot
-l,-lcn n = select channel number
-c,-cname xxx = select channel name contains
</pre>
Sample output
<pre>
# fmtrsv -s 16
ulslot = 16
ersvtype = 3 Recording
hsvc = 131097
nsttime = 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00
szsttime = 00000000000000
nduration = 3600 01:00
erepeat = 0 no repeats
usevtid = 12270
szevtname = i7Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's... (Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...)
ulPreOffset = 0
ulPostOffset = 0
ulProgramId = 0
ulSeriesId = 0
ucVolume = 0
ucInputMode = 0
usChNum = 0
ucRecKind = 4 series
ucCRIDType = 50 series
szCRID = FP.BBC.CO.UK/B-3P5L5
szFPBRecPath = Code-Breakers: Bletchley Park's...
szRecordedProgCrid = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KZSO7|
szEventToRecord = 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL|
aulEventToRecordInfo = {131097 1590429600 1590433200 12270}
bRecomRsv = 0
usLastRecordedEvtId = 0
eReady = 30
szSvcName = BBC TWO
usLcn = 2
Svcid Start End Evtid CRID
131097 1590429600 25/05/2020 19:00 1590433200 25/05/2020 20:00 12270 1FP.BBC.CO.UK/B/KOEPL
Skiplist Svcid:Evtid
131097:12390
========================================================

</pre>
== Other Stuff ==
=== Change history ===
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2020-06-05 ||schedchk 0.1.0|| mymsman || Intial Version
* All new!
|-
|2020-06-15 ||schedchk 0.1.1|| mymsman || Minor fixes
* Fixed problem with scrid change that stopped change to Cardinal series crid being recognized
* Check for gaps in EPG and don't reschedule programmes already scheduled in gap.
|}

=== Acknowledgements ===
;af123:For providing the cf framework that underlies everything and who's code I have copied and hacked.
;/df:For investigating the problems with Split recordings and writing the rsv set method
;everybody else:Who has assisted through the forums
=== Future Enhancements ===
* Detect and reschedule recordings active at time of crash
* Improve Series CRID change detection to reduce false positives

Remote Scheduling

2019-03-31T11:26:45Z

Black Hole: /* Searching the EPG */

__NOTOC__
[[File:rs-home.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:RS-EPG.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Sleep_Wake.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]
=== What is the Remote Scheduling Portal? ===

It's a web site which enables you to manage your list of scheduled recordings while you're out and about, from anywhere with a web browser and Internet connection, without having to expose your Humax device to the Internet or leave it powered on. As long as your Humax has Internet access and wakes up occasionally to check for updates or make a recording, it will work.

=== Getting Started ===

If you are not already running the Customised Firmware then please have a look at the Wiki and Black Hole's threads at the top of the http://hummy.tv Forum which cover how to get started and ready to move on.

* Make sure you're running at least version 1.11 of the Customised Firmware (see [[Firmware Downloads]];)
* Install the latest webif and rs packages;
* See '''Wireless Users''' [[#Notes | '''Notes''' ]] Below if you are connected via Wi-Fi
* Go to the Settings page in your device's local web interface and register with the remote scheduling service;
* Wait for your initial password to arrive via email;
* Access http://rs.hpkg.tv/ and accept the terms and conditions to get started.

When you first log in there is some important information regarding what the site will and won't do and general Terms & Conditions to agree to before you can proceed.

This gets you to the Home Screen which, to begin with, will show you the existing schedule details from your Hummy. There's also the Home button to return to this screen, [http://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/File:RS-Settings.png '''Settings'''] and Logout buttons. Plus there is the EPG button - click this to see the EPG which will look and feel much the same as that already on the web interface, And the [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''AUTO button''']] to set up automatic recordings / Alerts.

Clicking on the Pie Chart from any screen will allow you to [[#Managing_Your_Recordings | '''Manage your Recordings''']]

Clicking on a programme in the Top 10/100 list will display all broadcast times for that programme with the ability to set up a recording from there

=== Scheduling sequence of events ===

If your Humax is in standby when a new recording is '''Queued''' using Remote Scheduling, your Humax will not be aware of the new request until it is taken out of stand-by, when your Humax awakes the recording’s status will move to '''Pending''' and a further stand-by >> awake cycle is required in order to make the new recording request move to '''Active''' . It is possible to remove the need for a further stand-by >> awake cycle by requesting a ‘Scheduled Reboot’ in the RS screen so that the Humax will perform two reboots in one.

=== Frequency of wake-up ===

To have the best chance of being able to successfully schedule a recording, you should set your Humax to wake up at least once a day which is most easily done through the on-screen menus at Settings->Preferences->Time, see the screenshot on the right.

In conjunction with the overnight update check, this ensures that your device checks for new recordings at least twice a day. Any recordings that you have set will also enable the Humax to check for updates.

It is also possible to schedule additional wake-up/sleep periods via the RS portal using the [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands ]] option which is below the list of scheduled recordings. You may wish to do this when going away from home for an extended period for example.

===New Terms===
; rs package : The remote scheduling program that runs on your Humax box (which needs to be running the Customised Firmware including the Web Interface package)
; http://rs.hkpg.tv/ : The Remote Scheduling website that captures your schedule requirements and synchronises them to your box at home.

===Scheduling a Recording===

Go into the EPG screen. Peruse the channel listings, you can click on a channel name to see the full line up for that channel. Alternatively you can use the Search or click on the down arrow to search by genre.

There is a more detailed section on searching here [[#Searching the EPG | Searching the EPG]]

Click on the Programme Name that you want to schedule and you will get a dialogue box with more detailed programme info, plus buttons at the bottom to record the series, just the program, or cancel.

Once this is done the Home screen will now show a section at the top called Queued Commands - at this stage these are only stored on the website awaiting a sync with your Humax. Every 10 - 12 minutes or so (or on next reboot if the box is on standby) your box will contact the site to see if there is anything to sync and if there are items in Queued Commands they will be picked up and copied over to your Humax, and then they will appear in a Pending list. There is a 'last seen' time/date stamp at the top of the Home Page so you know if the site is seeing your box.

Please note that due to the way the core Humax software works a restart of the box is then required in order for Pending items to actually take place. This is why items in the Queued Commands list also have a button for "Schedule Reboot" - if you click this a reboot command is also sent to the Humax box along with your recordings, and the box will restart itself shortly after synchronising the Queued Commands thus ensuring your recordings/changes take place.

All boxes have an auto update task at 4:30 am every morning so at worst case they wake up every morning and any Pending Items already on the box will become active. Otherwise if you have the box on standby when you are not there you may want to schedule a power cycle or two so that the box wakes up and can pick up any Queued and/or Pending items and incorporate them fully into the schedule (there is a function for this under [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands]])

You can force a sync from the command line with :-

 /mod/sbin/rs_process now 

To push the schedule from the command line use :-

 rs push 

Don't forget that if you have the box on standby when you make the schedule then it'll need one wake up to pick up the scheduled item(s), then another in order to successfully incorporate them into the schedule on the Humax. You can send the second re-boot along with the schedule but the first has to already be defined on the box (either the built in daily 4:30am auto update or wake up/sleep cycles you can program yourself).

===Queued Commands===

These are the things you have done on the web site. Set recordings, deleted schedules. At this stage they are only held on the website until the next 5 minute 'sweep' or your Hummy wakes up and check the site.

===Deleting Queued Items===

You'll notice the Queued items list has a trashcan icon at the end of each line and this will remove the item from the Queue and therefore wont sync with your Hummy.

===Scheduled Events on Humax===

; Pending : The Humax knows about these items, but it needs a reboot in order to save them into the schedule list on the box so that they actually work as expected.
; Active : These are all the items the Humax knows about AND will carry them out in full.

===Deleting Scheduled Items===

(i.e. those already synchronised onto the Humax schedule or in the Pending List)

I will refer to items in the Active list but this works just the same for items in the Pending List.Click on the item in the Active list on the home page, and choose the 'Cancel Event' option. This will create a cancellation line in the Queued Commands list and will wait for the next sync between the site and your box.

Just like setting a recording the cancellation item will then sit in the Pending Queue on the box until a restart takes place hence you can also send along a reboot action with the cancellation just like you can with a new recording. BUT like setting a recording, if your box is in standby it needs to wake up in order to sync. in the first place. Less of a worry when deleting items as it's no problem to record something you now don't want any more.

===Additional Commands===

At the end of the Active list on the main page, there are options to Schedule a Reboot, create a manual event (a recording or reminder) and also view to the Raw Database

===Recent Activity===

This is a simple view of an event log - it's not meant to be an exhaustive audit trail but it does confirm that things are happening and when they happened. You can see a more detailed list of every event tracked by clicking the <tt>More</tt> button and then even more detail via the <tt>Diagnostic Entries</tt> button.

===Searching the EPG===

This functionality is still being refined but it is possible to do some more complex searches i.e. for more than one search term.

You can use the following operators and rules to refine/enhance the search results

+ stands for AND
- stands for NOT
[no operator] implies OR
"two words" in quotes must appear together
+doctor +(dalek tardis) - containing 'doctor' and either 'dalek' or 'tardis' (or both).

'''NB: Experience indicates this is not how the search is actually working. Search terms without any operators (which the above states should be treated as OR) are actually treated as an entire string (as if in double quotes). The entry box prevents inputting strings fewer than three characters.'''

[[File:rs-media.png|300px|thumb|right]]

===Managing Your Recordings===

Clicking in the 'Pie Chart' symbol in any screen will pull up a screen showing your recordings, From here it is possible to set up a Delete procedure that will be carried out the next time your Humax is in contact with the RS server

===Related Links===

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Visual|Remote Scheduling Visual]]

*[[Remote Scheduling Auto|RS Automatic Scheduling]]

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Settings|Remote Scheduling Settings]]

*[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal |RS Multi-mode Recording]]

===Notes===
; '''Wireless Users'''
: If your Humax is usually connected to your network via wireless, then it will not connect to the wireless network when it wakes up to make a recording. You can install the [http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/wireless-helper_1.0.0_mipsel.opk WIRELESS HELPER] package to change this behaviour and increase the opportunities for your Humax to check for new recordings.

: The wireless-helper package currently only supports wireless networks using WPA or WPA2. It is planned to extend support to at least WEP in a future release.

Remote Scheduling

2019-03-29T09:23:12Z

Black Hole: /* Searching the EPG */

__NOTOC__
[[File:rs-home.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:RS-EPG.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Sleep_Wake.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]
=== What is the Remote Scheduling Portal? ===

It's a web site which enables you to manage your list of scheduled recordings while you're out and about, from anywhere with a web browser and Internet connection, without having to expose your Humax device to the Internet or leave it powered on. As long as your Humax has Internet access and wakes up occasionally to check for updates or make a recording, it will work.

=== Getting Started ===

If you are not already running the Customised Firmware then please have a look at the Wiki and Black Hole's threads at the top of the http://hummy.tv Forum which cover how to get started and ready to move on.

* Make sure you're running at least version 1.11 of the Customised Firmware (see [[Firmware Downloads]];)
* Install the latest webif and rs packages;
* See '''Wireless Users''' [[#Notes | '''Notes''' ]] Below if you are connected via Wi-Fi
* Go to the Settings page in your device's local web interface and register with the remote scheduling service;
* Wait for your initial password to arrive via email;
* Access http://rs.hpkg.tv/ and accept the terms and conditions to get started.

When you first log in there is some important information regarding what the site will and won't do and general Terms & Conditions to agree to before you can proceed.

This gets you to the Home Screen which, to begin with, will show you the existing schedule details from your Hummy. There's also the Home button to return to this screen, [http://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/File:RS-Settings.png '''Settings'''] and Logout buttons. Plus there is the EPG button - click this to see the EPG which will look and feel much the same as that already on the web interface, And the [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''AUTO button''']] to set up automatic recordings / Alerts.

Clicking on the Pie Chart from any screen will allow you to [[#Managing_Your_Recordings | '''Manage your Recordings''']]

Clicking on a programme in the Top 10/100 list will display all broadcast times for that programme with the ability to set up a recording from there

=== Scheduling sequence of events ===

If your Humax is in standby when a new recording is '''Queued''' using Remote Scheduling, your Humax will not be aware of the new request until it is taken out of stand-by, when your Humax awakes the recording’s status will move to '''Pending''' and a further stand-by >> awake cycle is required in order to make the new recording request move to '''Active''' . It is possible to remove the need for a further stand-by >> awake cycle by requesting a ‘Scheduled Reboot’ in the RS screen so that the Humax will perform two reboots in one.

=== Frequency of wake-up ===

To have the best chance of being able to successfully schedule a recording, you should set your Humax to wake up at least once a day which is most easily done through the on-screen menus at Settings->Preferences->Time, see the screenshot on the right.

In conjunction with the overnight update check, this ensures that your device checks for new recordings at least twice a day. Any recordings that you have set will also enable the Humax to check for updates.

It is also possible to schedule additional wake-up/sleep periods via the RS portal using the [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands ]] option which is below the list of scheduled recordings. You may wish to do this when going away from home for an extended period for example.

===New Terms===
; rs package : The remote scheduling program that runs on your Humax box (which needs to be running the Customised Firmware including the Web Interface package)
; http://rs.hkpg.tv/ : The Remote Scheduling website that captures your schedule requirements and synchronises them to your box at home.

===Scheduling a Recording===

Go into the EPG screen. Peruse the channel listings, you can click on a channel name to see the full line up for that channel. Alternatively you can use the Search or click on the down arrow to search by genre.

There is a more detailed section on searching here [[#Searching the EPG | Searching the EPG]]

Click on the Programme Name that you want to schedule and you will get a dialogue box with more detailed programme info, plus buttons at the bottom to record the series, just the program, or cancel.

Once this is done the Home screen will now show a section at the top called Queued Commands - at this stage these are only stored on the website awaiting a sync with your Humax. Every 10 - 12 minutes or so (or on next reboot if the box is on standby) your box will contact the site to see if there is anything to sync and if there are items in Queued Commands they will be picked up and copied over to your Humax, and then they will appear in a Pending list. There is a 'last seen' time/date stamp at the top of the Home Page so you know if the site is seeing your box.

Please note that due to the way the core Humax software works a restart of the box is then required in order for Pending items to actually take place. This is why items in the Queued Commands list also have a button for "Schedule Reboot" - if you click this a reboot command is also sent to the Humax box along with your recordings, and the box will restart itself shortly after synchronising the Queued Commands thus ensuring your recordings/changes take place.

All boxes have an auto update task at 4:30 am every morning so at worst case they wake up every morning and any Pending Items already on the box will become active. Otherwise if you have the box on standby when you are not there you may want to schedule a power cycle or two so that the box wakes up and can pick up any Queued and/or Pending items and incorporate them fully into the schedule (there is a function for this under [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands]])

You can force a sync from the command line with :-

 /mod/sbin/rs_process now 

To push the schedule from the command line use :-

 rs push 

Don't forget that if you have the box on standby when you make the schedule then it'll need one wake up to pick up the scheduled item(s), then another in order to successfully incorporate them into the schedule on the Humax. You can send the second re-boot along with the schedule but the first has to already be defined on the box (either the built in daily 4:30am auto update or wake up/sleep cycles you can program yourself).

===Queued Commands===

These are the things you have done on the web site. Set recordings, deleted schedules. At this stage they are only held on the website until the next 5 minute 'sweep' or your Hummy wakes up and check the site.

===Deleting Queued Items===

You'll notice the Queued items list has a trashcan icon at the end of each line and this will remove the item from the Queue and therefore wont sync with your Hummy.

===Scheduled Events on Humax===

; Pending : The Humax knows about these items, but it needs a reboot in order to save them into the schedule list on the box so that they actually work as expected.
; Active : These are all the items the Humax knows about AND will carry them out in full.

===Deleting Scheduled Items===

(i.e. those already synchronised onto the Humax schedule or in the Pending List)

I will refer to items in the Active list but this works just the same for items in the Pending List.Click on the item in the Active list on the home page, and choose the 'Cancel Event' option. This will create a cancellation line in the Queued Commands list and will wait for the next sync between the site and your box.

Just like setting a recording the cancellation item will then sit in the Pending Queue on the box until a restart takes place hence you can also send along a reboot action with the cancellation just like you can with a new recording. BUT like setting a recording, if your box is in standby it needs to wake up in order to sync. in the first place. Less of a worry when deleting items as it's no problem to record something you now don't want any more.

===Additional Commands===

At the end of the Active list on the main page, there are options to Schedule a Reboot, create a manual event (a recording or reminder) and also view to the Raw Database

===Recent Activity===

This is a simple view of an event log - it's not meant to be an exhaustive audit trail but it does confirm that things are happening and when they happened. You can see a more detailed list of every event tracked by clicking the <tt>More</tt> button and then even more detail via the <tt>Diagnostic Entries</tt> button.

===Searching the EPG===

This functionality is still being refined but it is possible to do some more complex searches i.e. for more than one search term.

You can use the following operators and rules to refine/enhance the search results

+ stands for AND
- stands for NOT
[no operator] implies OR
"two words" in quotes must appear together
+doctor +(dalek tardis) - containing 'doctor' and either of 'dalek' or 'tardis' (or both).

NB: Search terms of three characters or fewer are ignored, because words like 'the' or 'and' would produce too many hits to be useful.

[[File:rs-media.png|300px|thumb|right]]

===Managing Your Recordings===

Clicking in the 'Pie Chart' symbol in any screen will pull up a screen showing your recordings, From here it is possible to set up a Delete procedure that will be carried out the next time your Humax is in contact with the RS server

===Related Links===

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Visual|Remote Scheduling Visual]]

*[[Remote Scheduling Auto|RS Automatic Scheduling]]

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Settings|Remote Scheduling Settings]]

*[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal |RS Multi-mode Recording]]

===Notes===
; '''Wireless Users'''
: If your Humax is usually connected to your network via wireless, then it will not connect to the wireless network when it wakes up to make a recording. You can install the [http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/wireless-helper_1.0.0_mipsel.opk WIRELESS HELPER] package to change this behaviour and increase the opportunities for your Humax to check for new recordings.

: The wireless-helper package currently only supports wireless networks using WPA or WPA2. It is planned to extend support to at least WEP in a future release.

Remote Scheduling

2019-03-29T07:39:08Z

Black Hole: /* Searching the EPG */

__NOTOC__
[[File:rs-home.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:RS-EPG.png|300px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Sleep_Wake.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]
=== What is the Remote Scheduling Portal? ===

It's a web site which enables you to manage your list of scheduled recordings while you're out and about, from anywhere with a web browser and Internet connection, without having to expose your Humax device to the Internet or leave it powered on. As long as your Humax has Internet access and wakes up occasionally to check for updates or make a recording, it will work.

=== Getting Started ===

If you are not already running the Customised Firmware then please have a look at the Wiki and Black Hole's threads at the top of the http://hummy.tv Forum which cover how to get started and ready to move on.

* Make sure you're running at least version 1.11 of the Customised Firmware (see [[Firmware Downloads]];)
* Install the latest webif and rs packages;
* See '''Wireless Users''' [[#Notes | '''Notes''' ]] Below if you are connected via Wi-Fi
* Go to the Settings page in your device's local web interface and register with the remote scheduling service;
* Wait for your initial password to arrive via email;
* Access http://rs.hpkg.tv/ and accept the terms and conditions to get started.

When you first log in there is some important information regarding what the site will and won't do and general Terms & Conditions to agree to before you can proceed.

This gets you to the Home Screen which, to begin with, will show you the existing schedule details from your Hummy. There's also the Home button to return to this screen, [http://wiki.hummy.tv/wiki/File:RS-Settings.png '''Settings'''] and Logout buttons. Plus there is the EPG button - click this to see the EPG which will look and feel much the same as that already on the web interface, And the [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''AUTO button''']] to set up automatic recordings / Alerts.

Clicking on the Pie Chart from any screen will allow you to [[#Managing_Your_Recordings | '''Manage your Recordings''']]

Clicking on a programme in the Top 10/100 list will display all broadcast times for that programme with the ability to set up a recording from there

=== Scheduling sequence of events ===

If your Humax is in standby when a new recording is '''Queued''' using Remote Scheduling, your Humax will not be aware of the new request until it is taken out of stand-by, when your Humax awakes the recording’s status will move to '''Pending''' and a further stand-by >> awake cycle is required in order to make the new recording request move to '''Active''' . It is possible to remove the need for a further stand-by >> awake cycle by requesting a ‘Scheduled Reboot’ in the RS screen so that the Humax will perform two reboots in one.

=== Frequency of wake-up ===

To have the best chance of being able to successfully schedule a recording, you should set your Humax to wake up at least once a day which is most easily done through the on-screen menus at Settings->Preferences->Time, see the screenshot on the right.

In conjunction with the overnight update check, this ensures that your device checks for new recordings at least twice a day. Any recordings that you have set will also enable the Humax to check for updates.

It is also possible to schedule additional wake-up/sleep periods via the RS portal using the [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands ]] option which is below the list of scheduled recordings. You may wish to do this when going away from home for an extended period for example.

===New Terms===
; rs package : The remote scheduling program that runs on your Humax box (which needs to be running the Customised Firmware including the Web Interface package)
; http://rs.hkpg.tv/ : The Remote Scheduling website that captures your schedule requirements and synchronises them to your box at home.

===Scheduling a Recording===

Go into the EPG screen. Peruse the channel listings, you can click on a channel name to see the full line up for that channel. Alternatively you can use the Search or click on the down arrow to search by genre.

There is a more detailed section on searching here [[#Searching the EPG | Searching the EPG]]

Click on the Programme Name that you want to schedule and you will get a dialogue box with more detailed programme info, plus buttons at the bottom to record the series, just the program, or cancel.

Once this is done the Home screen will now show a section at the top called Queued Commands - at this stage these are only stored on the website awaiting a sync with your Humax. Every 10 - 12 minutes or so (or on next reboot if the box is on standby) your box will contact the site to see if there is anything to sync and if there are items in Queued Commands they will be picked up and copied over to your Humax, and then they will appear in a Pending list. There is a 'last seen' time/date stamp at the top of the Home Page so you know if the site is seeing your box.

Please note that due to the way the core Humax software works a restart of the box is then required in order for Pending items to actually take place. This is why items in the Queued Commands list also have a button for "Schedule Reboot" - if you click this a reboot command is also sent to the Humax box along with your recordings, and the box will restart itself shortly after synchronising the Queued Commands thus ensuring your recordings/changes take place.

All boxes have an auto update task at 4:30 am every morning so at worst case they wake up every morning and any Pending Items already on the box will become active. Otherwise if you have the box on standby when you are not there you may want to schedule a power cycle or two so that the box wakes up and can pick up any Queued and/or Pending items and incorporate them fully into the schedule (there is a function for this under [[#Additional Commands | Additional Commands]])

You can force a sync from the command line with :-

 /mod/sbin/rs_process now 

To push the schedule from the command line use :-

 rs push 

Don't forget that if you have the box on standby when you make the schedule then it'll need one wake up to pick up the scheduled item(s), then another in order to successfully incorporate them into the schedule on the Humax. You can send the second re-boot along with the schedule but the first has to already be defined on the box (either the built in daily 4:30am auto update or wake up/sleep cycles you can program yourself).

===Queued Commands===

These are the things you have done on the web site. Set recordings, deleted schedules. At this stage they are only held on the website until the next 5 minute 'sweep' or your Hummy wakes up and check the site.

===Deleting Queued Items===

You'll notice the Queued items list has a trashcan icon at the end of each line and this will remove the item from the Queue and therefore wont sync with your Hummy.

===Scheduled Events on Humax===

; Pending : The Humax knows about these items, but it needs a reboot in order to save them into the schedule list on the box so that they actually work as expected.
; Active : These are all the items the Humax knows about AND will carry them out in full.

===Deleting Scheduled Items===

(i.e. those already synchronised onto the Humax schedule or in the Pending List)

I will refer to items in the Active list but this works just the same for items in the Pending List.Click on the item in the Active list on the home page, and choose the 'Cancel Event' option. This will create a cancellation line in the Queued Commands list and will wait for the next sync between the site and your box.

Just like setting a recording the cancellation item will then sit in the Pending Queue on the box until a restart takes place hence you can also send along a reboot action with the cancellation just like you can with a new recording. BUT like setting a recording, if your box is in standby it needs to wake up in order to sync. in the first place. Less of a worry when deleting items as it's no problem to record something you now don't want any more.

===Additional Commands===

At the end of the Active list on the main page, there are options to Schedule a Reboot, create a manual event (a recording or reminder) and also view to the Raw Database

===Recent Activity===

This is a simple view of an event log - it's not meant to be an exhaustive audit trail but it does confirm that things are happening and when they happened. You can see a more detailed list of every event tracked by clicking the <tt>More</tt> button and then even more detail via the <tt>Diagnostic Entries</tt> button.

===Searching the EPG===

This functionality is still being refined but it is possible to do some more complex searches i.e. for more than one search term.

You can use the following operators and rules to refine/enhance the search results

+ stands for AND
- stands for NOT
[no operator] implies OR
"two words" in quotes must appear together
+doctor +(amy tardis) - containing 'doctor' and either of 'amy' or 'tardis' (or both).

[[File:rs-media.png|300px|thumb|right]]

===Managing Your Recordings===

Clicking in the 'Pie Chart' symbol in any screen will pull up a screen showing your recordings, From here it is possible to set up a Delete procedure that will be carried out the next time your Humax is in contact with the RS server

===Related Links===

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Visual|Remote Scheduling Visual]]

*[[Remote Scheduling Auto|RS Automatic Scheduling]]

*[[Remote_Scheduling_Settings|Remote Scheduling Settings]]

*[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal |RS Multi-mode Recording]]

===Notes===
; '''Wireless Users'''
: If your Humax is usually connected to your network via wireless, then it will not connect to the wireless network when it wakes up to make a recording. You can install the [http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/wireless-helper_1.0.0_mipsel.opk WIRELESS HELPER] package to change this behaviour and increase the opportunities for your Humax to check for new recordings.

: The wireless-helper package currently only supports wireless networks using WPA or WPA2. It is planned to extend support to at least WEP in a future release.

Very Large Hard Drive

2019-02-17T13:19:04Z

Black Hole: /* Pre-requisites */

__NOTOC__

{{Warning|title=Work in progress|This page is a work-in-progress describing the process necessary to install a very large hard drive into a Humax HDR Fox T2.}}

With the release of Custom Firmware 3.10 it is now possible to fit a Humax HDR Fox T2 with a hard drive having more than 2^32 sectors. In practice this means that drives between 2TB and 4TB in size can now be used. Disks larger than 4TB have been found to cause problems with the Humax software reporting low amounts of free space.

===Drives known to work===

The following very large drives have been successfully tested:

{| class=wikitable
! AV? || Vendor || Description || Model || Size || Cache || RPM || Physical Sector || Logical Sector
|-
| * || Seagate || Video 3.5" HDD SATA || ST4000VM000 || 4TB || 64MB || 5900 || 4096 || 512
|-
| || Seagate || NAS 3.5" HDD SATA || ST4000VN000 || 4TB || 64MB || 5900 || 4096 || 512
|-
| || Western Digital || Green.. TBC || || 4TB
|}

{{Note|'''Always choose a specific Audio/Visual (AV) or Digital Video Recorder (DVR) drive if possible.'''

* Avoid drives which are designed for RAID use (e.g. WD Red and Purple drives) as they will have TLER (an error recovery option) enabled which can cause issues if there are problems with reading or writing to a sector. AV drives usually have this parameter disabled so that a failed write is just ignored and recording moves on. It can also cause complications when dealing with any problem sectors in the future as it causes some issues to be hidden from the host (the Humax in this scenario).
* WD Purple drives have a surprisingly low workload rating of 60TB/year and should be avoided.
* With any non-AV Western Digital disk, watch the disk stats to check if the load/unload count grows quickly which could indicate that automatic head parking after 8 seconds is enabled. This can (and should) be disabled using ''wdidle3''[http://www.storagereview.com/how_to_stop_excessive_load_cycles_on_the_western_digital_2tb_caviar_green_wd20ears_with_wdidle3]. }}

===Pre-requisites===

Using a very large drive '''''requires''''' Custom Firmware 3.10 or above. The stock Humax firmware cannot read these drives at all (it will see them but consider them to have a zero size).

===Partitions tables===

With these large drives, it is necessary to use a partitioning scheme called GUID Partition Table (GPT). When using a GPT, a legacy MBR containing a partition table is also created on the drive. This MBR generally contains a single partition of type ''EFI GPT'' (code 0xee) encompassing the entire drive (or as much of the drive as can be represented in an MBR partition - 2^32 sectors). This is known as a ''protective MBR'' since its main purposes is to prevent non-GPT-aware systems and tools from viewing the drive as empty or available. In the case of the Humax, it is necessary to create three partitions on the drive so that the Humax software sees these and considers the drive to be properly formatted.

===Creating the GPT and formatting the disk===

Restart the Humax into Maintenance mode then use the telnet menu to do the work for you. Just choose the ''gptf'' option and confirm that you really want to reformat the disk.

Menu version 1.20
Enter system PIN: ****

/---------------------------------------------\
| M A I N T E N A N C E M O D E M E N U |
\---------------------------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (gpttest) 1.03.12/3.10 ]

Note: Some areas of the hard disk are not mounted.
Not all functions will be available.
(normal if you have just run a disk check)

1 - Check and repair hard disk (fix-disk).
2 - Run short hard-disk self test.
3 - Run long hard-disk self test.
4 - Check self-test progress.
gptf - Re-format disk using GPT scheme.
epg - Clear persistent EPG data.
dlna - Reset DLNA server database.
x - Leave maintenance mode (Humax will restart).
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option: gptf

This process will format the internal hard disk using the GUID partitioning
scheme (GPT) which supports hard disks over 2TB in size.

****************************************************************
*** All data on the hard drive will be erased if you proceed ***
****************************************************************

Are you sure you wish to format and erase the disk? [Y/N] y
Are you sure you wish to do this? [Y/N] y
Are you sure you wish to COMPLETELY ERASE this hard disk? [Y/N] y

**********************************************************************
* Unmounting partitions...
**********************************************************************

**********************************************************************
* Clearing all existing partition tables...
**********************************************************************

Creating new GPT entries.
GPT data structures destroyed! You may now partition the disk using fdisk or
other utilities.

**********************************************************************
* Creating GUID partition table (GPT)...
**********************************************************************

Creating new GPT entries.
The operation has completed successfully.

**********************************************************************
* Creating MBR partition table...
**********************************************************************

>>> /dev/sda2: /dev/sda3: /dev/sda4:

**********************************************************************
* Final MBR table...
**********************************************************************

Disk /dev/sda: 465.8 GiB, 500107862016 bytes, 976773168 sectors
Units: sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
Disklabel type: dos
Disk identifier: 0x0c82049c

Device Boot Start End Sectors Size Id Type
/dev/sda1 1 2097151 2097151 1024M ee GPT
/dev/sda2 2097152 4194303 2097152 1G 83 Linux
/dev/sda3 4194304 6291455 2097152 1G 83 Linux

**********************************************************************
* Final GPT table...
**********************************************************************

Disk /dev/sda: 465.8 GiB, 500107862016 bytes, 976773168 sectors
Units: sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
Disklabel type: gpt
Disk identifier: 372B3BA4-7C50-4D29-8551-4A94E7826C05

Device Start End Sectors Size Type
/dev/sda1 2048 2099199 2097152 1G Linux filesystem
/dev/sda2 2099200 955801614 953702415 454.8G Linux filesystem
/dev/sda3 955803648 976773134 20969487 10G Linux filesystem

**********************************************************************
* Formatting partition 1...
**********************************************************************

mke2fs 1.42.10 (18-May-2014)
Creating filesystem with 262144 4k blocks and 65536 inodes
Filesystem UUID: a442c849-f26e-4dd0-b1fe-cef4cf8416b5
Superblock backups stored on blocks:
32768, 98304, 163840, 229376

Allocating group tables: done
Writing inode tables: done
Creating journal (8192 blocks): done
Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done

.... continues to format partitions 2 & 3 ...

Very Large Hard Drive

2018-10-07T07:59:23Z

Black Hole: /* Partitions tables */

__NOTOC__

{{Warning|title=Work in progress|This page is a work-in-progress describing the process necessary to install a very large hard drive into a Humax HDR Fox T2.}}

With the release of Custom Firmware 3.10 it is now possible to fit a Humax HDR Fox T2 with a hard drive having more than 2^32 sectors. In practice this means that drives between 2TB and 4TB in size can now be used. Disks larger than 4TB have been found to cause problems with the Humax software reporting low amounts of free space.

===Drives known to work===

The following very large drives have been successfully tested:

{| class=wikitable
! AV? || Vendor || Description || Model || Size || Cache || RPM || Physical Sector || Logical Sector
|-
| * || Seagate || Video 3.5" HDD SATA || ST4000VM000 || 4TB || 64MB || 5900 || 4096 || 512
|-
| || Seagate || NAS 3.5" HDD SATA || ST4000VN000 || 4TB || 64MB || 5900 || 4096 || 512
|-
| || Western Digital || Green.. TBC || || 4TB
|}

{{Note|'''Always choose a specific Audio/Visual (AV) or Digital Video Recorder (DVR) drive if possible.'''

* Avoid drives which are designed for RAID use (e.g. WD Red and Purple drives) as they will have TLER (an error recovery option) enabled which can cause issues if there are problems with reading or writing to a sector. AV drives usually have this parameter disabled so that a failed write is just ignored and recording moves on. It can also cause complications when dealing with any problem sectors in the future as it causes some issues to be hidden from the host (the Humax in this scenario).
* WD Purple drives have a surprisingly low workload rating of 60TB/year and should be avoided.
* With any non-AV Western Digital disk, watch the disk stats to check if the load/unload count grows quickly which could indicate that automatic head parking after 8 seconds is enabled. This can (and should) be disabled using ''wdidle3''[http://www.storagereview.com/how_to_stop_excessive_load_cycles_on_the_western_digital_2tb_caviar_green_wd20ears_with_wdidle3]. }}

===Pre-requisites===

Using a very large drive requires Custom Firmware 3.10 or above. The stock Humax firmware cannot read these drives at all (it will see them but consider them to have a zero size).

===Partitions tables===

With these large drives, it is necessary to use a partitioning scheme called GUID Partition Table (GPT). When using a GPT, a legacy MBR containing a partition table is also created on the drive. This MBR generally contains a single partition of type ''EFI GPT'' (code 0xee) encompassing the entire drive (or as much of the drive as can be represented in an MBR partition - 2^32 sectors). This is known as a ''protective MBR'' since its main purposes is to prevent non-GPT-aware systems and tools from viewing the drive as empty or available. In the case of the Humax, it is necessary to create three partitions on the drive so that the Humax software sees these and considers the drive to be properly formatted.

===Creating the GPT and formatting the disk===

Restart the Humax into Maintenance mode then use the telnet menu to do the work for you. Just choose the ''gptf'' option and confirm that you really want to reformat the disk.

Menu version 1.20
Enter system PIN: ****

/---------------------------------------------\
| M A I N T E N A N C E M O D E M E N U |
\---------------------------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (gpttest) 1.03.12/3.10 ]

Note: Some areas of the hard disk are not mounted.
Not all functions will be available.
(normal if you have just run a disk check)

1 - Check and repair hard disk (fix-disk).
2 - Run short hard-disk self test.
3 - Run long hard-disk self test.
4 - Check self-test progress.
gptf - Re-format disk using GPT scheme.
epg - Clear persistent EPG data.
dlna - Reset DLNA server database.
x - Leave maintenance mode (Humax will restart).
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option: gptf

This process will format the internal hard disk using the GUID partitioning
scheme (GPT) which supports hard disks over 2TB in size.

****************************************************************
*** All data on the hard drive will be erased if you proceed ***
****************************************************************

Are you sure you wish to format and erase the disk? [Y/N] y
Are you sure you wish to do this? [Y/N] y
Are you sure you wish to COMPLETELY ERASE this hard disk? [Y/N] y

**********************************************************************
* Unmounting partitions...
**********************************************************************

**********************************************************************
* Clearing all existing partition tables...
**********************************************************************

Creating new GPT entries.
GPT data structures destroyed! You may now partition the disk using fdisk or
other utilities.

**********************************************************************
* Creating GUID partition table (GPT)...
**********************************************************************

Creating new GPT entries.
The operation has completed successfully.

**********************************************************************
* Creating MBR partition table...
**********************************************************************

>>> /dev/sda2: /dev/sda3: /dev/sda4:

**********************************************************************
* Final MBR table...
**********************************************************************

Disk /dev/sda: 465.8 GiB, 500107862016 bytes, 976773168 sectors
Units: sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
Disklabel type: dos
Disk identifier: 0x0c82049c

Device Boot Start End Sectors Size Id Type
/dev/sda1 1 2097151 2097151 1024M ee GPT
/dev/sda2 2097152 4194303 2097152 1G 83 Linux
/dev/sda3 4194304 6291455 2097152 1G 83 Linux

**********************************************************************
* Final GPT table...
**********************************************************************

Disk /dev/sda: 465.8 GiB, 500107862016 bytes, 976773168 sectors
Units: sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes
Disklabel type: gpt
Disk identifier: 372B3BA4-7C50-4D29-8551-4A94E7826C05

Device Start End Sectors Size Type
/dev/sda1 2048 2099199 2097152 1G Linux filesystem
/dev/sda2 2099200 955801614 953702415 454.8G Linux filesystem
/dev/sda3 955803648 976773134 20969487 10G Linux filesystem

**********************************************************************
* Formatting partition 1...
**********************************************************************

mke2fs 1.42.10 (18-May-2014)
Creating filesystem with 262144 4k blocks and 65536 inodes
Filesystem UUID: a442c849-f26e-4dd0-b1fe-cef4cf8416b5
Superblock backups stored on blocks:
32768, 98304, 163840, 229376

Allocating group tables: done
Writing inode tables: done
Creating journal (8192 blocks): done
Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done

.... continues to format partitions 2 & 3 ...

ChaseDecrypt

2018-10-01T21:02:23Z

Black Hole:

[[file:Chasedecrypt.png|left|x32px|Icon]]
= ChaseDecrypt - Decrypt while recording =
== Overview ==
ChaseDecrypt runs whilst a recording is in progress allowing remote access to a programme via file Sharing and a media player like VLC.

'''This package is experimental and is not intended to be a replacement for Auto Decrypt'''

You can choose that all programmes for specified channels are processed using the [[ChaseDecrypt#Channel inclusion list|Channel inclusion list]] or just certain programs by using the [[ChaseDecrypt#Folder flags|Folder flags]]

If a programme is selected for both ChaseDecrypt and [[DetectAds#Detect whilst recording -Chaserun processing|DetectAds Chaserun]] then DetectAds will take the precedence.
__TOC__
== Installation ==
ChaseDecrypt is in the Advanced Packages catalogue. You may need to press the '''Show''' button on the package list to display Advanced packages.

Chaseget, ir and some other packages used by ChaseDecrypt will be installed/upgraded automatically as needed.

ChaseDecrypt needs to be able to decrypt the file itself. For this, the minimum requirement is a network connection and to ensure Content Sharing is enabled via ''Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Setting >> Content Share = On''. This setting can be enforced using the ''bootsettings'' package.

For more information regarding the need for, and implementation of, decryption see [[Encryption]] or [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/using-fox-t2-recordings-with-plex-media-server.2003/#post-25775 Decryption Guide (hummy.tv forum)].

== Folder Flags ==
There is a new folder flag ChaseDecrypt which can be Enabled/Disabled via the Opt+ menu, when a new recording start in a folder with this flag it will be decrypted whilst it records. The flag has no effect on existing recordings.

The Auto Decrypt option should also be specified to provide a backup in case of failure during recording.

== Settings ==
[[file:ChasedecryptSettings.png|Settings page]]

Options specified via the webif Settings section for ChaseDecrypt are:
;Original recording:Select what happens to original recording after successful processing
* Keep, original is kept, decrypted version has -dec suffix
* Move to Bin, Original is moved to dustbin (if Undelete package is installed), decrypted is renamed to original
* Delete, Original is permanently deleted, decrypted is renamed to original
;Other Options:Other options that can be specified are
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Option || Default || Description
|-
| '''-d''' -debug|| || produce detailed debug
|-
| -misRdSec || 0 || How much data can be missing from decrypted recording before an error is raised (in Seconds) 
Errors during decryption tend to be at the end of a recording and can often be recovered by retrying decryption once the recording is complete
|-
| -delSec || 210 || Delay start of processing until n seconds after recording begins 
Initial delay to provide a reasonable batch of date to be processed
|}

== Channel inclusion list ==
[[file:ChasedecryptInclusionSettings.png|center|Channel inclusion page]]
No channels are included by default.

You can type a generic matching rule such as 'BBC *' in the left hand or ctrl-click on specific channels and then click the ← button to transfer them to the left column. * would match all channels,

To remove entries from the left column position the cursor and use delete or backspace keys.

== Thumbnail Generation ==
If you have the thumbnails package to generate thumbnail image following autodecryption that will not be triggered when using ChaseDecrypt. Instead you can use the Sweeper rule shown below to trigger thumbnail generation.
[[File:ChaseDecrypt- Sweeper.png|center|Sweeper rule for thumbnail generation]]

== Change History ==
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2018-10-01 ||chasedecrypt 0.1.0-0 || MymsMan || Initial version
|}

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2018-10-01T08:06:29Z

Black Hole: /* Redring */ Incorrect uses of "e.g." replaced with "i.e."

'''BRIEF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require any additional packages to be installed. These features are covered in the Web If section of this page.

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect.}}

Also, see Forum Links [[Forum_Links|'''HERE''']]

==7Zip==

Command line utility that can pack and unpack zip type files

*Supported Packing / unpacking formats = 7z, XZ, BZIP2, GZIP, TAR, ZIP and WIM
*Supported Unpacking only = ARJ, CAB, CHM, CPIO, CramFS, DEB, DMG, FAT, HFS, ISO, LZH, LZMA, MBR, MSI, NSIS, NTFS, RAR, RPM, SquashFS, UDF, VHD, WIM, XAR and Z.

==Arbookmarks==

Adds bookmarks into automatically or manually padded recordings, bookmarks are placed at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording | '''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points to all files in folders marked as Auto Decrypt, the following conditions must be met before the Bookmarks will be added :-
* The Arbookmarks package must be installed
* Files must be in a folder that is marked for auto-decryption ([[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Folders|'''open lock icon''']] present)
* Files must be DLNA indexed (automatically done by the Humax periodically, [[Icons#Media_Browser_-_Files|'''lime green circular icon''']] present)
* Files must not be recorded using AR i.e. the AR flags are not at start and end of file
* AR flags must be present i.e. recordings made in the middle of a programme won't contain AR flags

==At==

at, batch, atq, atrm - queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution. This is the UNIX at command and atd daemon, which allow for scheduling of one-off commands to be run when specified.

More notes [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/At_%28Unix%29 '''HERE''']

==Auto Schedule Restore==

This package checks whether the schedule is present on each boot, If a schedule is in place it is backed up to flash, otherwise the schedule and any favourites list are restored from the flash backup. The schedule will be deemed to be present if there is at least one schedule item or one reservation item existing

'''NOTES:-'''
* After a re-boot the restore process will start and "Schedule Restored . . . Rebooting" will be displayed on the front display
* A second re-boot will take place automatically after 15 seconds to finalise the restoration process
* The Web-if will display "The recording schedule has been automatically restored" after the second re-boot

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto-Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on High Definition recordings on the HDR-Fox T2. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted in the same way as a Standard Definition file. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any High Definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter, new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed. See reset_unprotect [[Diagnostic_Utilities | '''HERE''']] to fix any 'missed files'.

Auto, Auto-Unprotect makes a change to the DLNA index so that High Definition files can be streamed without DTCP, Note, Foxy does not remove DTCP which is required for DLNA decryption

NOTES:-
*The removal of the ENC flag does not decrypt the file, however it does make decryption possible by the same means as for a Standard Definition file - see flow chart [[Encryption |'''HERE''']].
*Auto-Unprotect on the HD-Fox T2 will not allow decryption unless the HD-Fox T2 is running in BootHDR mode

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them. It will check once per day at the earliest power on - for most people probably the 04:30 boot.

==Badnts==

Utility to fix a recording error where a full size TS file is recorded but the associated NTS file generated by the Humax is of zero length, this results in the the Humax rejecting the file on playback. After the recording is decrypted in a folder that is marked for auto-decyption, the utility will look for a zero length NTS file and if found the NTS, THM and HMT files will all be deleted (or moved to the [Deleted] folder), this will make the TS file playable on the Humax,however as the 'sidecar' files have been removed there will be some play-back
limitations, e.g. transport controls etc.
'''Notes'''
*This utility only works on HDR-Fox T2 not HD-Fox T2
*Only files stored in an auto-decrypt folder will be fixed

==Bash==

Bourne Again SHell is an enhanced [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh | '''Sh (Shell)''']] Command line / scripting language. [http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/manual/bashref.html '''See Reference Guide''']

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server. The default server will still be available after the Custom Firmware is installed, however only files under ‘Media’ are visible. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation. Betaftpd has two possible Logins. If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessible. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used.

==Blocklist==

See Transmission (torrent) Block List notes [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Blocklist_2|'''HERE''']].

==Bookmark==

The Humax Bookmarks used to place 'jump-to' points within a recording are also used by several Custom Firmware packages, as Follows:-
*[[Edit_On_Box|'''Edit On Box''']] . . . A single or multiple bookmarks are used as cut and join points for editing a recording in the Web-If [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] option
*[[#Set_Thumbnail|''' Set Thumbnails''']] . . . Uses the the first bookmark in a recording as a central point from which to pick a new thumbnail
*[[#Arbookmarks|'''Arbookmarks''']] . . . Bookmarks are automatically added to a recording at [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] start and stop points so that a [[#Crop|'''Crop''']] can be performed

==BootHDR==

<big>'''This package is for the HD-FOX T2 only (NOT for HDR-Fox T2</big>''') 

It allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume. BootHDR can be installed from the Web-If packages screen (of the HD-Fox T2 only). Here is the equivalent command line (Telnet) :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

Once the package is installed you can run in HDR-Fox T2 mode, while in this mode, the front panel display will freeze and the box will be incapable of making new recordings. To initiate HDR-Fox T2 mode copy the *Modsettings/TriggerHDR folder to the root of drive1 and then re-boot the HD-Fox T2

Installing the BootHDR package also adds the command line keyword bootHDRmode, this can be used to invoke HDR mode

There is a Guide to using BootHDR on the Wiki [[Decrypt_recordings_on_the_HD-FOX_T2 | '''HERE''']]

==Boot_Settings==

Set system parameters to specified values on every boot. [Update settings]

==Bsed==

Binary-safe search/replace utility.

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system. Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sh_.28SHell.29 | '''Sh (Shell)''']] commands that can be used in Telnet sessions. The list below shows the available commands. There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extension to get some help e.g. ls -?

A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE'''].

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing.

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==Channeldel==

Automatic channel deletion. select TV channels to be permanently removed from the group TV list in Web-If >> Settings >> Automatic Channel Deletion, selected channels, plus a set of 9 unavailable channels known to cause problems will be automatically deleted the next time the Humax is booted, and following any retune

Select all but one file and press delete to reduce the current list in /mod/boot/chandel.conf, the remaining file can be deleted later

==Chaseget==

Retrieve and decrypt recording, can run whilst recording is still in progress

This is intended to be used as part of other packages (such as detectads) rather than installed and used standalone

Runs as first stage of pipeline, output is always to stdout

Usage= /mod/bin/chaseget recording.ts start_offset logfile > output.ts

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote file systems must currently be performed from the command line. Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs //server/share "/media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==CLI==

This is an acronym for Command Line Interface, a CLI can be established by Telnetting into the Humax and being presented with a CLI prompt, If the Tmenu is displayed there will be a 'cli' option to gain the CLI prompt e.g. humax#

==Content Sharing==

Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> Content Sharing = On

Content Sharing is an in-built DLNA / UPnP server that allows the HDR to stream content over it's LAN connector to a DNLA / UPnP client, this feature is also used by the Custom Firmware to provide decryption of both Standard Definition and High Definition content

==Crashdiag==

Captures a memory dump (core file) when the main Humax process crashes,The dump files will end up in /mod/core/ called humaxtv.<UNIX timestamp> and a reboot is required following package installation in order to activate it

==Crash Log==

The Mulitenv 1.4 package contains a procedure that monitors the behaviour of running processes, If the Humax crashes a file will be generated under /mod/tmp/ called crash.log, it can be examined from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files. The Crash log will tell you if Custom Firmware plug-ins are being disabled as a result of the crash, To re-start undelete, redring and ir packages, run Web-If >> Diagnostics >> fix-flash-packages >> Run Diagnostic. To prevent the crash log auto disabling plug-ins, create a file with the following command :-
<pre>
touch /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/no_plugin_autodisable
</pre>

==Cron==

Cron is a time-based job scheduler that will auto-run tasks for you. It is built into Busybox which is a standard utility on your Humax, so Cron does not need to be installed. The tasks are held in a Cron table or crontab. Here is an example crontab :-

<pre>
humax# cd /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/
humax# cat root
0 2 * * * /mod/sbin/anacron -s -d
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
*/10 * * * * /mod/sbin/rs_process >> /mod/tmp/rs.log 2>&1
humax#

</pre>

Each line of crontab has the following structure:

<Minute> <Hour> <Day> <Month> <Day of Week> <Command line> Note :- * = All or Every

The three examples above will run
#at 2AM every day
#at 1 Minute and 31 Minutes of every Hour every day
#every 10 Minutes continuously

It is possible to display all cron jobs with the following command line:-

 crontab -l 

To add a new cron job edit file /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root and add a new line

==Cryptokey==

This is the unique key that is used by the Humax HDR / HD to encrypt and decrypt all recordings on the hard disk, it is made up from the MAC address of the unit (6 pairs of hexadecimal) followed by the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal)

The cryptokey can be examined, changed and reset (Cleared) to the original by sending the following [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nugget | '''nugget''']] command line options :-

<pre>
humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>

humax# nugget cryptokey 01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01.01
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

humax# nugget cryptokey -clear
Cleared custom encryption key.

humax# nugget cryptokey
Native key: dc d3 21 01 02 03 36 33 37 31 30 35 37 36 33 30
Using key: <no custom key in use>
</pre>

The cryptokey is used by the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts | '''Stripts Package''']] when decrypting files on the Humax

==Curl Command==

curl command line utility.

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal that adds more features.

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==DB Update==

General boot-time database update utility

==Dedup (Command Line)==
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|right|150px]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|right|150px]]
The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser.

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectively replaces the command line package. However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Dedup (Series Helper File)==

It is possible to create a series helper file that Dedup can use to enhance the re-naming of series, the file should be placed in the directory containing the series and named series.info, Dedup will look for this file and automatically use it, an example of a series.info file is shown below :-

<pre>
Pilot ==> S1-01
Pilot The Big Bang Theory ==> S1-01
The Big Bran Hypothesis ==> S1-02
The Fuzzy Boots Corollary ==> S1-03
The Luminous Fish Effect ==> S1-04
The Hamburger Postulate ==> S1-05
The Middle Earth Paradigm ==> S1-06
The Dumpling Paradox ==> S1-07
The Grasshopper Experiment ==> S1-08
The Cooper-Hofstadter Polarization ==> S1-09
</pre>

The above 'full' file is stored here :- [http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info '''http://hummypkg.org.uk/series/tbbt.series.info''']

==DeRMA==

After a Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Set-Return-to-manufacturer (RMA) Mode operation has been carried out, standard Humax software should be re-installed, this should leave the Humax in an 'out-of-the-box' state, however if for any reason the 'RMA' message is still being displayed, then loading this package onto a USB stick and inserting it into the Humax, while it is running, will remove the RMA message

==Detectads==

This package will attempt to add bookmarks to a recording to indicate the start and end of advert breaks, so that the adverts can be removed with a crop function, cropping can optionally be performed automatically within the package,

Using the new 'Detect while recording' function the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even, with some limitations, start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

See [[DetectAds]] for more information about this package

==Disable DSO==

Disable automatic retuning in response to Digital-Switch-Over events. When the Humax carries out a retune all recording Schedule events and all Favourites Lists will be erased, however recorded programmes will not be erased. DSO events are sent to the Humax by the TV broadcasters when they need to change some aspect of the Electronic Programme Guide, such as changing a channel number or adding extra channels

==Disable OTA==

Disable OTA inhibits any Over The Air software updates transmitted by Humax by deleting OTA schedules created by the Humax, it also has a "Create Reminder to cover OTA Period = Y / N" option in the Settings page, this will create a reminder on the Red Button (channel 200) to cover the OTA period, if you want it to use a different channel or on / off time, you can edit the reminder using the standard Humax on-TV menus, you can also disable the reminder option completely, however this if this is done the there is a small possibility that a DSO may still be actioned on your Humax

==Display==

A command that can be used to display a message on the HDR-Fox T2 front panel, any alpha-numerics (Max 12 characters) can be displayed, scrolling is not available. The new message will displayed until the unit is rebooted or changed by the Humax, example :-

 /sbin/display 'Twelve Chars' 

The display can be blanked with :-

 /sbin/display ' ' 

The display of the HD-Fox T2 (Max 4 characters + colon) can also be used by adding '$' to the string e.g. :-

 /sbin/display '$he:lp' 

'''NOTE''' If the Humax updates the display e.g. after a channel change or is scrolling the display then your message will be removed

==DLNA-Filter==

Filters out DLNA server network traffic to prevent other DLNA servers from crashing the Humax. File /mod/etc/init.d/S02dlna-filter contains rule="-p tcp --dport 50001 -j DROP". From default the package works on all IP addresses, however in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for DLNA-Filter package, it is possible to restrict operation to one or more specified IP addresses

'''NOTES'''
*DLNA-Filter requires Custom Firmware Version 3.00 or later
*DLNA-Filter will block access to the Humax DLNA server if the Settings for DLNA-Filter package is left blank

==DLNA-Servername==

This package enables Humaxs on the same network to be given a unique Media Server Name. It requires that Custom Version 2.20 or above be installed

==Dropbear SSH==

A secure shell (ssh) server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is a secure alternative to using Telnet
to gain command line access - although it causes the box to do more work. Also allows the use of ''scp'' (secure copy) as a secure alternative to FTP.

Login with username=root, password=humax

Create file /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys containing a list of public keys

Note :- chmod 700 /mod/.ssh and chmod 600 /mod/.ssh/authorized_keys

==Dropbear SFTP==

Greenend-sftp is a plugin for dropbear-ssh which provides SFTP server functionality.SFTP is often used to provide remote virtual filesystem (VFS) access to the Humax's filesystem, e.g. via FUSE. For further info. click link [http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/sftpserver/ '''HERE''']

==DUMA==

D.U.M.A. - Detect Unintended Memory Access - A Red-Zone memory allocator. It can detect memory leaks and buffer overruns (or underruns) in a malloc() / new memory buffer. DUMA is a fork of Bruce Perens' Electric Fence library.

==Dvbsnoop==

Utility for inspecting DVB files. Some more info [http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE'''].

Note that one cannot inspect live streams off air on the Humax, as the Humax doesn't provide the required software interface to its DVB hardware.

==E2fs_Progs==

Ext2/3/4 File system Utilities. The Linux File Disk system used on the Humax. Useful for formatting a USB Flash drive in EXT2 to avoid journalling. First allow the Humax to format the drive as EXT3 then follow the procedure [[FAQs#How_do_I_convert_a_drive_to_EXT2.3F|'''HERE''']].

==[Eject]==
[[File:Eject.png|left|50px]]
The Eject icon is displayed (If a USB Device is detected), on all Web-if Headers adjacent to the FREEVIEW icon, when the user clicks on this icon, a list of USB devices attached to the Humax will be displayed with the following information (from Left to Right) :-

*USB interface name
*USB Device name
*Format type, e.g. FAT32, NTFS, EXT3 etc.
*Device % used
*Device capacity
*Eject Option

To the far right there is an eject icon, when the user clicks on this icon, an option will be displayed, e.g. "Eject USB-1? - OK or Cancel, If OK is selected the USB device will be unmounted, this is similar to the Windows option "Safely Remove Hardware"

If 'Device not mounted' is displayed, the user can click on the recycle icon (far right) to display a 'Rescan OK/Cancel' option, this will allow a rescan and the USB device will be re-mounted

'''NOTES'''
*This feature is only present on the HDR-FOX T2, not the HD-FOX T2

==EPG==

The command line utility used by the Electronic Program Guide in the Web-If e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

==Epgfix==

epgfix causes a channel change once a day (by default at 4am) for 3 minutes before restoring the original channel it was tuned to. This is enough to trigger the Humax software to keep the EPG up to date.
You need at least a single service on an alternative mux. to the one the box is tuned to for it to work. Changing to a different service on the same mux. was found not to work reliably enough.

There is no user interface, no settings and nothing to configure. The only thing you can change is the time of operation if it is not suitable!
You have to do this manually by editing the /mod/bin/epgfix entry in the /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/root file. This is easily available using the File Editor on the WebIf's Diagnostics page.

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package was a web interface plugin which allowed a list of keywords to be configured and when found an email was sent Weekly to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which matched the keywords.

NOTE:- The EPG Keywords functionality has now been moved to [[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''Remote Scheduling Auto''']].

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Epgpatch==

Utility for patching EPG information in a completed recording, it is used to fix problems in TV areas that use non standard EPG data e.g. Ireland Saorview

==Enable Telnet==

This USB loaded package will re-enable telnet for the Custom Firmware, it performs the following command lines :-

<pre>
rm -f /var/lib/humaxtv/mod/notelnet
/etc/init.d/S50telnet start << /dev/null >> /dev/null 2>&1
</pre>

==Exfat==

This package adds support for reading and writing files in the Exfat format

Please take the time to read the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ExFAT '''Wikipedia'''] article on exFAT

==Exfat Builder==

'''See Exfat above'''

[[File:exfat-panel.png|right]]
'''Note that this package does not add exFAT support to your system, only provides a simple method for you to do it yourself.''' This is because there are licence and patent issues around exFAT and if we were to make the compiled exFAT code available in the repository then we would be in violation of at least some of them.

The package provides a web page (accessible from the standard web interface settings screen) from which you can download, build and install the required files in a single step. It will:

*Download an open-source exFAT implementation from Google Code;
*Unpack and modify the code to support the Humax;
*Compile the files into binaries which can run on the Humax;
*Install the compiled binaries on your system;
*Add hooks to automatically mount exFAT disks when they are detected.

==EXTRA.css==

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet|'''Webif Style Sheet''']]

==Fan==

the default fan speeds set by humax are :-
*70% - once the HDD temperature reaches 55°C
*65% - when the temperature drops to 54°C
*55% - when the temperature drops to 51°C
*0% - when the temperature drops to 49°C

This utility allows the user to set a minimum continuous fan speed between 0% and 100%, By setting a minimum fan speed higher than zero it is possible to prevent the fan reaching the noisier 70% setting. If the Humax requests a higher speed setting, this higher speed will be used

'''Notes'''

*After an initial Humax restart, this package can change the minimum fan speed on-the-fly every two minutes
*The fanspeed (0 - 255) is stored in the /mod/boot/fanspeed file
*Changes made by this package will be displayed in the /tmp/humaxtv.log file, if Diagnostics >> debugtv >> Run Diagnostic has been run

<pre>
Editing /tmp/humaxtv.log
Sun Sep 15 10:42:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 255 (ff)
Sun Sep 15 10:44:36 2013 Applying minimum fan speed = 0 (0)
</pre>

==Ffmpeg==

FFmpeg will record, convert, extract and stream audio and video. It includes libavcodec - the leading audio/video codec library. It also displays information about video and audio files. See Link [http://ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- Ffmpeg operations performed on the Humax can be very demanding on CPU time, especially when performing conversions rather than extractions. The following examples were carried out using a version of Ffmpeg running on a P.C.rather than on the Humax.

Convert an extracted MP3 audio file in MP2 format to the more common MP3:-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -vn -ar 44100 -ac 2 -ab 192000 -f mp3 output.mp3

Extract an MPG file from a Hi-Definition TS file from the Humax :-

 ffmpeg -i input.ts -target pal-dvd -vcodec copy -acodec copy output.mpeg

There is also a GUI from end available for the P.C. version of ffmpeg [http://avanti.arrozcru.org/'''HERE''']

==Fix-disk==

Fix-Disk is a disk partition repair utility (built into Custom Firmware Ver 2.12 and above) for the Humax HDR-Fox T2. It does a full file system check, repairing minor faults automatically as it goes. It will also allow you to fix the delete loop problem. A fix-disk.log file will be generated in /mod/tmp/ and can be viewed using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> View Log Files

To invoke the Fix-Disk utility follow the Maintenance Mode Guide [[Maintenance_Mode | '''HERE''']]

==Fix-disk (USB)==

As fix-disk is now built into Custom Firmware 2.12 and is therefore already resident on your hard drive, the USB version is no longer recommended or supported. However it is still available [[http://www66.zippyshare.com/v/44898524/file.html '''HERE''']].

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu. Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder. Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders. After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten.

'''NOTES'''
#All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed
#Flatten runs every 15 Minutes when the box is not in standby

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders whose names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==Flatview==

FlatView is an alternative to flatten, it provides both a flattened view and a hierarchical view at the same time by creating a new top-level directory (called " [FlatView]" by default). Recordings appear in both without using any additional disk space

'''NOTES'''

*Recordings deleted from the flattened view area are automatically removed from the original location in the hierarchy and the original folder will be removed if it is empty;
*Recordings deleted from the hierarchical view will be automatically removed from the flattened area too;
*If a recording is renamed in either area, then the change will be reflected in the other (there may be a small delay);
*Changes in flags such as 'Unwatched' and the resume point are synchronised across the two locations;
*If you move a recording out of the flattened view area, the system will think that it has been deleted and will remove the corresponding recording from the hierarchical view area;
*If you move a recording into the flattened view area, it will be left untouched
*Command line option = /mod/webif/plugin/flatview/run

'''Exceptions'''

*The contents of folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders with names in square brackets [Like This] will not appear in [Flatview]
*The contents of folders containing a file named .noflatten will not appear in [Flatview]

==Flexget==

FlexGet is a multi-purpose automation tool for content like torrents, nzbs, pod-casts, comics, series, movies, etc. It can use different kinds of sources like RSS-feeds, html pages, csv files, search engines and there are even plugins for sites that do not provide any kind of useful feeds.

A Typical Cron entry for Flexget would be :-

 */1 * * * * /mod/bin/flexget -c /mod/.flexget/config.yml --cron 

* Flexget Documentation [http://flexget.com '''HERE''']

==Flexview==

FlexView is intended to offer an alternative to the traditional webif to allow you to view an manage your recording inventory in whatever way suits you

[[FlexView | '''See a Guide to Flexview''']]

==Forcedate==

This utility forces the date on your Humax to 16 November 2011 12:34:56. It is required if the Humax can't get Time / Date info Over The Air. After using Forcedate it is possible to set time / date to internet time automatically on boot-up using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Ntp_Client | '''NTP Client''']].

==Foscam==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''HERE''']].

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax. The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP server for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required. Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package. If access to the whole file structure is required, programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
* 10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
* login = humaxftp
* password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==Foxlink==

Helper package for linking a HD Fox-T2 to a HDR, See [[Foxlink|'''Guide Here''']]

==Fuse==

With FUSE it is possible to implement a fully functional filesystem in a userspace program.

==Genre Icons==

It is possible to inhibit the Genre Icons displayed in the Web-If, see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Webif_Style_Sheet | ''' Web-If Style Sheet''']]

==Git==

Distributed version control system designed to handle everything from small to very large projects with speed and efficiency.

==Grep==

Grep is built into Busybox and is used to search through a file or files looking for specified blocks of text. The output can be displayed on-screen or sent to a new file. [http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?egrep Syntax Here]

Associated utilities = Egrep, Fgrep

<pre>
humax# cat original-file.txt

-H Add 'filename:' prefix
-h Do not add 'filename:' prefix
-n Add 'line_no:' prefix
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-q Quiet. Return 0 if PATTERN is found, 1 otherwise
-v Select non-matching lines
-s Suppress open and read errors
-r Recurse
-i Ignore case
-w Match whole words only
-F PATTERN is a literal (not regexp)
-E PATTERN is an extended regexp
-m N Match up to N times per file
-A N Print N lines of trailing context
-B N Print N lines of leading context
-C N Same as '-A N -B N'
-e PTRN Pattern to match
-f FILE Read pattern from file

humax# grep match original-file.txt
-l Show only names of files that match
-L Show only names of files that don't match
-c Show only count of matching lines
-o Show only the matching part of line
-v Select non-matching lines
-e PTRN Pattern to match
humax#
</pre>

==Gnu Fdisk==

GNU fdisk.

==Hdparm==

hdparm is a command line utility for setting and viewing ATA hard disk drive hardware parameters. It can set parameters such as drive caches, sleep mode, power management, acoustic management, and DMA settings.

==HMT==

This package displays information on, and allows editing of, the Humax *.hmt file, which is a small 'side-car' file created alongside the main *.ts video file.

From a Telnet session, navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

'''hmt Options List'''
<pre>
humax# hmt
Humax HMT Tool v2.0.6, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: hmt [command] <filename> [filename] ...
Commands:
+/-new Mark/unmark recording as new.
+/-lock Mark/unmark recording as locked.
+/-guidance Mark/unmark recording as having guidance.
+/-protect Enable/disable protection (prevents decryption on copy).
+/-encrypted Mark/unmark recording as encrypted.
+/-shrunk Mark/unmark recording as shrunk.
+/-dedup Mark/unmark recording as deduped.
+/-detectads Mark/unmark recording as ad-detection-done.
-p Display parseable file information (see *).
-list Display file information (default).
-bookmarks Display bookmarks.
+addbookmark=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+setbookmarks=<seconds>[:<seconds>]...
+clearbookmarks
+settitle=<new title>
+setsynopsis=<new synopsis>
+setguidance=<new guidance>
+setfolder=<new folder> (patch hmt only)
+setfilename=<new filename> (patch hmt only)
+setgenre=<genre> (can just specifiy initial part)
+setresume=<resume point (seconds)> (-seconds to set from end)

Generic patch commands:
+patch8=offset:value patch 8-bit value
+patch16=offset:value patch 16-bit value
+patch32=offset:value patch 32-bit value
Offset and value can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

Generic read commands:
+read8=offset read 8-bit value
+read16=offset read 16-bit value
+read32=offset read 32-bit value
Offset can be preceeded with 0x to indicate hex.

* Parseable output is tab delimited and contains the following fields:
Title, Synopsis, HD/SD, LCN, Channel Name,
Start time, End time, Flags, Guidance, Bookmark count,
Scheduled start, Scheduled duration, Genre code,
Resume point, Status/Reason.

</pre>

'''Notes'''
*+addbookmark=100:200:300 = Add to existing bookmark list
*+setbookmarks=100:200:300 = replace bookmark list with this new ones
*+setbookmarks= = same as +clearbookmarks i.e. remove all bookmarks

==hmt-linux==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Linux platform (not for the Humax)

==hmt-solaris==

A version of hmt compiled to run on a Solaris platform (not for the Humax)

==Hrwconv==

Wrapper script for ffmpeg and sidecar packages to convert 9200T/9150T/9300T files to HDR format

It is recommended that you create a new directory and move your existing 9200T/9150T/9300T files and their sidecars into it, Hrwconv will not make any changes to the originals but will create new files so you will need to ensure that you have enough free disk space.

After installing the package, connect to the Humax via Telnet, change directory 'cd' to the new directory and then run:-

<pre>hrwconv *.ts</pre>

After a few hours the new files will have been created in the subdirectory 'new'

==HTTPS==

HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is an extra layer built into the normal HTTP protocol used to access the Web-Interface for the Humax, It provides a more secure connection to the Humax. An HTTPS Server can be enabled in Web-If >> Settings >> General Settings >> HTTPS web server = On

==Humaxrw==

Utility to copy recordings from a Humax 9200T/9150T/9300T hard disk that is connected to the HDR via USB. The files recorded on 9000 series Humaxs are playable on the HDR, however the HDR can't directly read a hard disk formatted on a 9000 series, Humaxrw will allow the transfer of files between 9000 series and the HDR.

After installing Humaxrw, access to the utility is by [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet | '''Telnet''']] command line.

More background information [http://humaxdisk.wikispaces.com/HumaxRW '''HERE''']

<pre>
humax# humaxrw -h
Host <-> Humax disk
===================
Usage: humaxrw [options] HUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from Humax disk to current directory
-d <list> delete recordings
-g <list> get recordings to current directory
-h help (this text)
-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-p <filename> put recording(s) onto Humax disk
-u <list> unprotect recordings
-v version
-x extended listing for humaxdiag
-w pause at the end waiting for a keypress
-y answer yes to all prompts

Advanced Options
-D Delete time shift recording buffers
-E Update all synopsis/info data for version 1.00.20 or later
-H <list> get hre files for recordings
-M <n> modify recording number n (use with -O & -V options)
-O <n> offset for modify recording (use with -M & -V options)
-V <n> modify recording value (use with -M & -O options)
-Z Delete EPG save data

Humax disk -> Humax disk
========================
Usage: humaxrw [options] SRCHUMAXDISK DESTHUMAXDISK

-b backup all recordings from source Humax disk
and copy to destination Humax disk
-g <list> get recordings from source disk
and copy to destination Humax disk

Recovery mode - use if record list is missing/corrupt
=============
Usage: humaxrw -r [options] HUMAXDISK

-i <list> get info for recordings
-l list recordings
-n no info - use if corruption is really bad
-g <list> get recordings to current directory as recover_nnnn.ts

Example of a list: 10-20,30,41-42
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files.
<pre>
humax# humidify
HDF Tool v1.0.4, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: humidify [options] <filename>
-C Skip checksum validation.
-c <arguments> Create HDF file ('-c help' for more).
-d<level> Enable debugging at level.
-l Show contents of HDF file (default).
-o Use old-style checksum blocks when creating.
-r Don't compress blocks when creating.
-S<section> Extract only the numbered section.
-t Test archive (validate checksums).
-x Extract files.
-s Also show/extract member checksums.

Examples:

View HDF: humidify file.hdf
Test HDF: humidify -t file.hdf
Extract HDF: humidify -x file.hdf
Create HDF: humidify -c file.hdf (run 'humidify -c help' for more)

</pre>

A cross platform version of Humidify can be downloaded from the packages page, [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''HERE''']]
It contains the following files:-

[[File:Humidify-1.0.2.zip.jpg]]

==Hwctl==

Hardware control utility - Use with caution ! ! !

==Id3v2==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files. See also See also [[#Popol |'''Popol''']].

Available commands:

<pre>
-h, --help Display this help and exit
-f, --list-frames Display all possible frames for id3v2
-L, --list-genres Lists all id3v1 genres
-v, --version Display version information and exit
-l, --list Lists the tag(s) on the file(s)
-R, --list-rfc822 Lists using an rfc822-style format for output
-d, --delete-v2 Deletes id3v2 tags
-s, --delete-v1 Deletes id3v1 tags
-D, --delete-all Deletes both id3v1 and id3v2 tags
-C, --convert Converts id3v1 tag to id3v2
-1, --id3v1-only Writes only id3v1 tag
-2, --id3v2-only Writes only id3v2 tag
-a, --artist "ARTIST" Set the artist information
-A, --album "ALBUM" Set the album title information
-t, --song "SONG" Set the song title information
-c, --comment "DESCRIPTION":"COMMENT":"LANGUAGE"
Set the comment information (both
description and language optional)
-g, --genre num Set the genre number
-y, --year num Set the year
-T, --track num/num Set the track number/(optional) total tracks

You can set the value for any id3v2 frame by using '--' and then frame id
For example:
id3v2 --TIT3 "Monkey!" file.mp3
would set the "Subtitle/Description" frame to "Monkey!".
</pre>

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plug-in (see webif settings page). The log file is blanked whenever the box set to standby and a new one created when switched from standby.

For freedns.afraid.org the hostname in settings should be of the form:
xxxx.xxxxxxxx.xxxxx, <user name hash>
Where <user name hash> is obtained from the freedns website, when logged on

==In Use==

Utility for checking whether a recording is in use.

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax.

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']].

==Ir (Web-If Remote Controller)==

This package adds a fully functioning Remote Controller to the Web Interface. Full Details [[WebIf_Remote_Controller|'''HERE''']].

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files. With no extensions it will default to 'All' open files, but it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language) that runs on the Humax unix platform.

==Jpnevulator==

Serial Port Sniffer.

==Joe==

Text Editor. See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']].

==Kernels==

An alternative Kernel for the HDR-Fox T2 is loadable via USB upgrade, the zip files contains copies of the standard kernels and a version with GUID/EFI support

==Lighttpd==

Lighttpd is a replacement for the mongoose Web server used on the Humax to handle it's Web-If pages. [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

For more information on lighttpd click [http://www.lighttpd.net/ '''HERE''']

==LDD==

ldd prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library specified on the command line

==Libpcre==

Perl-compatible Regular Expressions Library

==Libunwind==

Utility used with the Crashdiag package

==LibParted==

Library for the [[#Parted|'''Parted''']] package

==Libsndfile==

A C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound.

==Loaders==

{{Warning|title=WARNING !|Although the installation of a new loader only takes a few seconds (unlike a full firmware change), it is imperative that there is no power interruption during the process as this could cause the Humax to become permanently inoperative (bricked)}}

The Loader - sometimes called the Boot Loader is a small routine that the Humax runs on start-up, the version of your Loader is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the Humax screen immediately after the unit is taken out of standby, there are currently 4 loader versions known to be installed on the HDR-Fox T2, they are :-
a730, a731, a733 and a734.

Different versions of loader may improve 'Green Screen' HDMI handshake problems found on some televisions, a link to the hummy.tv discussion can be found [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/hdmi-issue-with-bravia.8203/page-2#post-116204 '''HERE''']

==M4==

GNU M4 is an implementation of the traditional Unix macro processor. More notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/m4/ '''HERE''']

==Maintenance Mode==

This is as special mode that the Humax can be placed in, to carry out checks etc. on the system. See Guide [[Maintenance_Mode|'''HERE''']]

==Mediatomb==
A UPnP Media Server, This package allows the HD T2 to stream content to other devices on your network, as the HD T2 does not have this facility built-in. There is a user Guide [http://mediatomb.cc/pages/documentation '''HERE''']

==Mongoose==

Mongoose was the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package used to present Web pages, it has been replaced by Lighttpd.

==Multienv==

Helper utility for modifying the set top environment, Used by other packages.

==Multi-mode==

[[Multi-mode_Recording | '''See Guide HERE''']]

==Mvdisks==

Mounts external drives (connected via USB) under "My Video" to allow export by the DLNA server (HDR only)
Note:- It is possible to change the name of the moved USB directory from 'usb-disk' to another name by using Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor and replacing 3 of the 4 'usb-disk's with a new name in the file /mod/etc/mdev/rmvdisks.The second occurrence of 'usb-disk' does not need changing

*Allows recording directly to a USB drive on the HDR
*Allows files on a USB drive to be served via DLNA (HDR only)

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directories to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the Humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc).

'''Notes'''

#The "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")
#Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.
#Wake up On LAN (WOL) is available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set wakeNow? to remove the '?' for a single wake or wakeConstantly? to remove the '?' to repeat every few seconds. A script called wakecmd in mod/sbin is now called up that contains both ether-wake and the WOL script
#If option ShareFolder = off, the mount will appear in the USB section and either a real USB device or virtual2 must be installed
#If option ShareFolder = on, the mount will appear under 'My Video'
[[File:warning-anim.gif|100px|left]]
''' DELETING THE MY VIDEO/[SHARES] FOLDER WILL DELETE FILES ON YOUR REMOTE COMPUTER / LAPTOP/ NAS ETC. '''

To safely remove the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder :-
#Delete the configuration file created in [ModSettings]/NFS or [Modsettings]/SMB
#reboot the Humax
#Ensure there are no active shares in the [Shares] folder
#Turn off the remote device holding the shared files
#Delete the [Shares] DO NOT DELETE folder

==Nano==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==New Portal==

This package adds a new front-end to the standard Humax TV Portal, See guide [[Custom_TV_Portal | ''' HERE''']]

==Newk==

This utility will create a folder on the hard disk with a chosen prefix removed, in order to tidy-up the folder title, so for example when recording a new series called "New: The Walking Dead" a folder will be created called "The Walking Dead" and all new recordings will be placed into it, if the prefix "New: " is placed in Webif >> Settings >> Automatic Series Prefix Removal settings.

Note:- Existing series folder will not be renamed by the Newk package

==Nicesplice==

A recorded program editing utility, See [[Edit_On_Box | '''Edit On box Guide''']], Nicesplice also 'Shrinks' the file using [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Stripts|'''Stripts''']]

==Nsplice==

Nsplice is supplied with the '''[[DetectAds]]''' package, it is a version of the Nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can only read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==NTFS Progs==

This utility contains diagnostic tools and a utililty to format a partition as NTFS

==Ntp Client==

Network Time Protocol sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection or your Humax doesn't keep good time. Ntpclient runs with the -l option which also adjusts the time in between system boots.

Note :- This utility may also need [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Forcedate | '''Forcedate''']] to be loaded, In order to get the date near the current as NTP won't change a time / Date that is too far out. More notes [http://doolittle.icarus.com/ntpclient/ '''HERE''']

==Nugget==

Nugget framework, handles a number of utilities sent from the commeand line, current option are :-

<pre>
nugget <command>
ping - Test nugget connectivity.
status - Show nugget status and version.
schedule.load - Load recording schedule from disk.
schedule.save - Save recording schedule to disk.
schedule.slot - Update timers for schedule slot.
schedule.db - sqlite3 database handle info.
schedule.epg - Display EPG information for slot.
schedule.timers - Show internal timers.
cryptokey - Set or display encryption key.
</pre>

==OPKG==

Open PacKaGe Management is the tool used to handle Custom Firmware packages, Here Are some examples :-

opkgHID= list all opkg commands

opkg install http://hummypkg.org.uk/hdrfoxt2/base/auto-unprotect_1.0.6_mipsel.opk HID= Install a remote package

opkg listHID= list of available packages

opkg list-installedHID= list of installed packages

opkg remove auto-unprotectHID= uninstall a package Note: No version numbers

 opkg install undelete --force-reinstall HID= Force a package reinstall

 opkg whatdepends anacron HID= Show dependants

==Opkg-beta==

When this package is installed beta versions of installed packages will be made available in 'Package Management >> Upgrades' screen

==Parted==

GNU Partition Editor. On-line User Manual [http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/manual/parted.html#Introduction '''HERE]

==Popol==

A command line ID3v1.1 tagger for MP3 files, If is possible to insert the following fields into an MP3 ID3 header. See also See also [[#Id3v2 |'''Id3v2''']]

<pre>

-s, --songname set songname
-a, --artist set artist
-l, --album set album
-c, --comment set comment
-y, --year set release year
-t, --tracknum set track number

</pre>

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Portal Xtra1==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Xtra1 (USB)==

This is a version of the Portal Xtra1 that runs in Flash memory, this package was built to run on the Humax HD-Fox T2 without an External Hard Disk Drive and is installed Via USB only. See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Xtra1 | '''HERE''']]

==Poweron-Channel==

NOTE:- This package was replaced by the Boot-Settings package with the release of Webif 1.4

This Utility forces the Humax to always power up on a selected TV channel regardless of the last channel viewed, After installing the Poweron-Channel package, select options in Web-If >> Settings >> Settings for poc package >> Click here for settings

*Power-On Channel = Selected TV Channel for start-up (See note 1)
*Volume = 0-20 or Last Audio Volume
*Power-On Channel Group = Select Favourites List or None

*Disable Subtitles on every boot (See Note 3)
*Turn the DLNA server on at every boot (See Note 3)

'''NOTES'''
# Ensure that the selected Poweron TV channel is included in the selected Favourite group
#A scheduled wake-up will use the channel set in the on-TV menus at Settings>>Preferences>>Time>>Channel not the Power-On Channel settings
# Only available by editing /mod/boot/pox using Diagnostics >> File Editor (details below)
# The parameters set by Poweron-Channel are contained in the /var/lib/humaxtv/setup.db database, other items may be added to the pox file from this database, but please use extreme caution, their functions are not fully understood
<pre>
humax# cat /mod/boot/pox
# Poweron-channel additional options.

# Example: uncomment the following line to disable subtitles on every boot
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:SUBTITLE_DISPLAY_F:1

# Example: uncomment the following line to turn the DLNA server on at each
# boot in case it has been turned off.
#TBL_MENUCONFIG:DMS_START_ON:1

</pre>

==Procps==

procps is the package that has a bunch of small useful utilities that give information about processes using the /proc file system. The package includes the programs ps, top, vmstat, w, kill, free, slabtop, and skill.Version 3 includes NPTL thread support, a rewritten top, many bug fixes, performance improvements, and new features. Link [http://procps.sourceforge.net/ '''HERE''']

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and side-car files to locally attached drives, A search of attached drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everything under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Python==

A package that adds the Python programming language

==Python Setuptools==

Setup tools including Easy_Install for the Python programming language, see notes [[http://pypi.python.org/pypi/setuptools#using-setuptools-and-easyinstall|'''HERE''']]

==Recmon==

Utility for executing another process whenever a recording starts or finishes

Recmon runs every script in /mod/etc/recmon.d in response to events. The order that they are run in is not guaranteed (they actually run in parallel).
The commands are run with two arguments, a switch saying which event triggered this and the base name of the recording file (no extension).

e.g.

/mod/etc/recmon.d/test -start "/media/My Video/path/to/recording"

Flags are -start, -stop, -move and -delete. Usually -move is called twice, once for the source location and once for the destination.

Examples
<pre>
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -start "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
/mod/etc/recmon.d/auto-unprotect -stop "/media/My Video/The Resident_20150520_0007"
</pre>

==Rc app bridge==

Utility that enables the Humax HDR-Fox T2 to be controlled by the TV Remote App. (supplied by Humax) that runs on the I-Phone, the same App. is also available on the Android platform, however version HMARG 1.0.4 does not appear to work with this package

'''Notes'''
* This package requires Content Share to be enabled

==Real Time Scheduling (RTS)==

When the Custom Firmware was developed, Scheduled events created in the Web-If or Via Remote Scheduling were placed into a pending queue and only moved into the main schedule on the next boot or reboot, In Web-If version 1.3.2-1 and later, it is possible to automatically progress from the 'Pending' stage directly to a fully scheduled stage without the Humax having to perform a boot cycle. This option can be enabled / disabled with the :- Settings >> Advanced Settings >> Real Time Scheduling Yes / No option

==Redring ==

Causes the Humax to display a Red LED ring when recording in standby, plus various other front panel options detailed in the table below. The new settings are configurable using the Web-If >> Settings >> Redring Settings

{| border="1"
|+ '''GENERAL SETTINGS'''
! width="250"| Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Purple When dual Recording
! 11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Purple
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Debugging Log
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Debug
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN FULLY AWAKE i.e. TV Display = On'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Disable Screen Scrolling
! Scrolling On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Scrolling Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Enable Clock
! Clock Off
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Clock On
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Elapsed Time During Playback
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Elapsed Time
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Show Play HH:MM Instead of Clock
! N/A
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | HH:MM
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Blue Brightness

Red Brightness
! Fixed
100% > 50%

after 3 Mins.
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable

Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%

0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Playback Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
Fixed
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN HALF AWAKE i.e. Waiting / Recording from standby or OTA Search'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Show Blue LED Ring
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Blue
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Show Red LED Ring (Recording)
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Red
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
10% to 100%
|}

{| border="1"
|+ '''WHEN IN STANDBY i.e. Hard Disk Not Spinning'''
! width="250"|Humax Status
! width="100"|Humax Default
! width="150"|With Redring
! width="100"|Redring Setting
|-
! align="left" |Override LED Ring Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11% Amber
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Amber Brightness
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|-
! align="left" |Override Display Brightness
Brightness
! Fixed
11%
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | Switchable Override
Variable
! bgcolor=#ffbbbb | On / Off
0% to 100%
|}

 HIDE ** = Change from Humax default

'''Notes'''

*Redring can cause slight delay of Remote Control key presses, e.g. Pause etc.
*Problems writing to the /mod/tmp/redring.log will be listed in the /var/log/humaxtv.log after diagnostics >> debugtv is run

==Renumber==
[[File:renumber.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Channel re-numbering support, for each channel that you wish to change, enter a new number into the box and save changes. Next time you reboot your Humax, the channel numbers will change around. If you ever rescan the channels on your box then the next time you reboot they will be automatically changed to match your saved preference. Once installed, a new option will be shown in the Web Interface Settings screen, probably near the bottom.

Renumbering channels is useful for people who want to swap the high-definitions services with their standard-definition counterparts, e.g. swap BBC ONE for BBC ONE HD putting BBC ONE HD on channel 1, and can also be used to re-order channels (e.g. move BBC HD to channel 8) to be closer to the start of the EPG. Of course another way to achieve this is to use the standard favourites feature in the Humax software to define your own list of channels and order them to suit.

'''Notes'''

*The renumber settings appears under the "reorder" section of the settings page on the Web-If
*The [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tunefix | '''Tune Fix''']] package has replaced the Renumber package

==Reset Webif==

Reset Webif will clear out all of the custom firmware packages and files without affecting your recordings or scheduled recordings. It is designed to be executable by booting from a Flash USB device loaded with the Reset Webif utility and is useful when the 'Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Remove All Custom Firmware packages and settings' is not available, Wait for the light to stop flashing then remove the disk and reboot the Humax (using the remote control). If you point a web browser at the Humax then you'll be back at the initial installation interface.

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Muti-Mode==

Full Guide[[Multi-mode_Recording#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Remote Scheduling Mobile==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Mobile_Edition#Multi-Mode_Recording_Via_RS_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==rs==

Command line tool that carries out a number of functions relating to the Remote Scheduling service, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# rs
Humax Remote Scheduling Tool v1.3.1, by af123, 2011-2015.

Syntax: rs [options] <command>...

Options:
-d[level] Set debug level.
-D<seconds> Sleep for random(seconds).
-h Show help text.
-i Show detected machine info.
-q Be more quiet.

Commands:
register <email> Register this device.
push Push scheduled events.
cmd Retrieve next queued command.
ack <id> Acknowledge command <id>.
status Show device registration status.
log <msg> Send log message to server.
epg Distributed EPG management.

</pre>

==rs time==

Command line utility that returns a number in seconds, that indicates the time offset between your Humax unit and the Remote Servers time

==RMA==

The Return to MAnufacturer Web-If option under [[Diagnostic_Utilities |'''Diagnostics''']] removes Custom Firmware files from the internal hard disk drive of the HDR Fox T2, following an RMA the user should re-install a version of official Humax Software to complete the 'Out of the Box' status of the Humax

'''Notes'''
* After running the procedure, 'RMA' will be displayed in the front panel display, this message should be removed after the official Humax Software is installed, however if the message is still present, it is possible to remove it by running the [[#DeRMA | '''DeRMA''']] USB package
* More options for removing the Custom Firmware are detailed in the [[Remove_Modified_Firmware | '''Remove Modified Firmware''']] page

==Rsvsync==

Boot-time reservation sync service

==Rsync==

A fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool, example :-

 rsync -avr --progress --delete --exclude 'Tsr/' mnt/hd2/ root@synology ip::NetBackup 

This [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Cron|'''cronjob''']] example would run at 01:05 each day, keeping the internal and external disks in sync - you just need to ensure the box is on at that time via a reminder or other mechanism.

 5 1 * * * /mod/bin/rsync --archive --delete-after --log-file=/mod/tmp/rsync.log /media/My\ Video/ /media/drive1/Video/ 

The Custom Firmware and Humax setup can be copied from an existing Humax to a new Humax by installing the rsync and dropbear packages on both units and then entering Maintenance Mode on the new Humax and sending the following two command lines :-

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/var/lib/humaxtv/ /var/lib/humaxtv/ 

 rsync -avr <ip address of old humax>:/mnt/hd2/mod/ /mnt/hd2/mod/ 

[http://ss64.com/bash/rsync.html '''More Info.''']

==rt3070==

This package was a replacement wireless driver which allowed for a wider range of wireless dongle vendor types, it was removed from the packages list because version 1.0 is not compatible with the latest 1.03.XX versions of Custom firmware

==Samba==

Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax file system from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems. Samba operates using 'Server Message Block' (SMB), also known as Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols

To map a network drive in windows :-

#Click Start, click My Network Places, click Entire Network, and then double-click Microsoft Windows Network.
#Double-click the domain that you want to open.
#Double-click the computer that has the shared resource you want to map. All the shared resources for that computer automatically appear in the window.
#Right-click the shared drive or folder that you want to map, and then click Map Network Drive.
#Click the drive letter that you want to use, and then specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer.
#Note Network drives are mapped by using letters starting from the letter Z. This is the default drive letter for the first mapped drive you create. However, you can select another letter if you want to use a letter other than Z.

Drive sizes can be incorrectly reported, to avoid this set path = /media/My Video in the /mod/etc/smb.conf file

'''Tips'''

#Ensure Samba is enabled in Web-If >> Service Management
#If the Windows 'WORKGROUP' has been changed from default, edit file /mod/etc/smb.conf to match the new name

==Scons==

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool—that is, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic Make utility with integrated functionality similar to autoconf/automake and compiler caches such as ccache. In short, SCons is an easier, more reliable and faster way to build software

==Screensaver==

If you pause live TV for more than 3 Mins. you will see the current time displayed on the TV screen, This is a screensaver and is designed to prevent ‘burn-in’ on flat panel TVs. The digits are made up of a series of pictures that are stored on the Humax in this read only area :- /opt/share/images/blue/821-4, It is possible to change these pictures to remove the screensaver completely (Black) or use a different font. After a new screensaver package is loaded, it will automatically become the new screensaver, you can select from installed screensaver plug-ins using the Web-If >> Settings screen

When screensaver is first installed only ‘Humax default’ is present, this is the 'flip Clock' default screensaver, If Black is installed then a completely Blank screen will be displayed. All screensaver plug-ins can be installed separately from the Web-If, e.g. the first screensaver Plug-in shown below is called screensaver-3X5, here is a list of plug-ins available :-

{| border="1"
|-
!3X5
>>>
|[[File:3X5.png|200px]]
!Neon
>>>
|[[File:neon.png|200px]]
!Avatar
>>>
|[[File:avatar.png|200px]]
|-
! 7Seg
>>>
| [[File:7Seg.png|200px]]
! Neon-Blue
>>>
| [[File:neon-blue.png|200px]]
!Wedge
>>>
|[[File:Wedge.png|200px]]
|-
! Dot
>>>
| [[File:Dot.png|200px]]
! Agen
>>>
| [[File:Agen.png|200px]]
!Cursor
>>>
|[[File:Cursor.png|200px]]
|-
! VFD
>>>
| [[File:VFD.png|200px]]
! Glass-Blue
>>>
| [[File:glass-b.png|200px]]
!Maze
>>>
|[[File:Maze.png|200px]]
|}

'''screensaver-all''' = Install all current screensavers from the package server

''' screensaver-random''' = Randomly select from the list of installed screensavers

Telnet selection of installed screensaver Plug-ins as follows e.g.:-

<pre>
humax# screensaver
1: 3X5
2: 7Seg
3: Black
4: Cursor
5: Humax Default
6: Neon
7: Neon-Blue
8: VFD
Choose option [1-8]:</pre>
'''NOTES:-'''
*The Humax will need to be placed into stand-by before the new screensaver will be displayed
*If screensaver-all is installed, it must be uninstalled before other screensaver plug-ins are uninstalled
*If any of the screensaver Plug-ins are uninstalled the display will default to Humax Default

==Sed==

GNU Stream Editor, A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream, application notes [http://www.gnu.org/software/sed/manual/sed.html '''HERE'''] or [http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Sed.html#uh-0 '''HERE''']

==Series Filer==

'''NOTE'''

'''The Series Filer package is no longer supported, the functions it carried out can be replicated by the [[sweeper | '''Sweeper''']] package, the following notes have been retained for reference only.'''

This utility will re-locate series folders created at the top level of My Video to Selected Sub-Directories so that they can be grouped together. After a New series folder has been created by the Humax at the top level, Simply move this series folder to a Sub-directory that you have created e.g. move the Doctor Who series folder to a sub-folder called ‘His Video’. When the next instalment of Doctor Who is transmitted the Humax will create another Doctor Who folder at the top level again, However, If Series Files is running the new instalment will be moved to the ‘His Video / Doctor Who’ automatically. Program names will also be re-named (if possible) to give more detail of each episode

'''NOTE:-'''

The early versions of Series Filer were not compatible with the Undelete package because the [deleted] directory was not handled correctly. Please DO-NOT run Series Filer versions before 0.2.2 with any version of the Undelete package, version 0.2.2 and above are safe to use

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==Sh (SHell)==

Sh or Shell is a command line / scripting language built into Busybox that is roughly equivalent to the Windows DOS (Disk Operating System) utility. It is however a lot more powerful than DOS and is a true language

==Sidecar==

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Sidecar Files

Recreates sidecar files .hmt and .nts from a .ts source file.

Command line options :-
<pre>
sidecar v2.5, a utility for the Humax HD/HDR Fox T2, by raydon (c) 2014-2018
Usage: sidecar [-options] <recording name minus .ts extension>

-n : Create new .nts file
-h : Create new or update existing .hmt file
-x : Exclude Prog/PMT ID's from .hmt file
-c : <Channel number for .hmt file>
-t : <Channel name for .hmt file>
-p : Display progress bar
-i : Display infomation

Enclose recording or channel name in quotes if they contain spaces or special characters e.g. &.

humax#
</pre>

'''NOTES'''
# The Sidecar package must be installed using the Web-If >> Main screen >> Package Management >> Available screen
# TS files must be decrypted before running Sidecar, If the TS is encrypted see note 5 below
#Source video not native to the HDR/HD Fox T2, or that has been processed using some third party application may not be compatible
#There are versions of sidecar complied for Linux and Windows platforms [[Customised_Firmware_-_Features_Available#Miscellaneous_Software_Utilities | '''Here''']]
# if the ts file is encrypted, the package will create dummy hmt and nts files to allow the file to be decrypted i.e :-
*Use Sidecar to create the dummy hmt and nts files
*Once indexed by the DLNA server, manually decrypt via 'Opt+' menu in Web-If
*When the TS file is decrypted, simply run Sidecar again to create hmt and nts files providing full transport control.
*There is no need to delete the dummy hmt or nts files since sidecar will detect these, and replace them with valid files
*Sidecar can recreate valid hmt and nts file for both video and radio recordings

==Smartmontools==

This utility will report on the condition of the S.M.A.R.T. hard disk drive, After installing the package enter the following command line using Telnet :-

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A 

or

 mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -a HIDE for more details

Documentation [http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/smartmontools/wiki/TocDoc'''HERE''']
<pre>

humax# /mod/bin/smartctl /dev/sdb -A
smartctl 5.41 2011-06-09 r3365 [7405b0-smp-linux-2.6.18-7.1] (local build)
Copyright (C) 2002-11 by Bruce Allen, http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===
SMART Attributes Data Structure revision number: 10
Vendor Specific SMART Attributes with Thresholds:
ID# ATTRIBUTE_NAME FLAG VALUE WORST THRESH TYPE UPDATED WHEN_FAILED RAW_VALUE
1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate 0x000f 114 099 006 Pre-fail Always - 66811863
3 Spin_Up_Time 0x0003 097 097 000 Pre-fail Always - 0
4 Start_Stop_Count 0x0032 098 098 020 Old_age Always - 2878
5 Reallocated_Sector_Ct 0x0033 100 100 036 Pre-fail Always - 0
7 Seek_Error_Rate 0x000f 078 060 030 Pre-fail Always - 70502101
9 Power_On_Hours 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3294
10 Spin_Retry_Count 0x0013 100 100 097 Pre-fail Always - 0
12 Power_Cycle_Count 0x0032 099 099 020 Old_age Always - 1439
184 End-to-End_Error 0x0032 100 100 099 Old_age Always - 0
187 Reported_Uncorrect 0x0032 097 097 000 Old_age Always - 3
188 Command_Timeout 0x0032 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
189 High_Fly_Writes 0x003a 093 093 000 Old_age Always - 7
190 Airflow_Temperature_Cel 0x0022 055 044 045 Old_age Always In_the_past 45 (0 109 45 32)
194 Temperature_Celsius 0x0022 045 056 000 Old_age Always - 45 (0 13 0 0)
195 Hardware_ECC_Recovered 0x001a 048 039 000 Old_age Always - 66811863
197 Current_Pending_Sector 0x0012 100 100 000 Old_age Always - 0
198 Offline_Uncorrectable 0x0010 100 100 000 Old_age Offline - 0
199 UDMA_CRC_Error_Count 0x003e 200 200 000 Old_age Always - 0
</pre>

NOTE:- If an external Hard disk Drive is found on boot up the Internal Hard disk will be /dev/sdb, If no External Hard Disk drive is found at boot up the the internal Hard disk will be /dev/sda

==SQLite3==

SQlite is a database file handler, e.g. files that typically end in *.db can be opened, edited etc. With readline support (arrow key editing and history)

==SRT==

The Humax is able to play subtitles for MP4 and AVI files if the subtitle information is contained in an *.srt file, the following conditions must be met :-

*The srt file must have the same title as the video file e.g. Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.srt for Fawlty-Towers-S1E3.avi
*The .srt file needs to be saved as a text file specifically with ANSI encoding to avoid using fonts that are licensed

'''Notes'''

1) Windows Notepad will produce a ANSI encoded srt file

2) Saving the .srt file with UTF-7 encoding is reported to be more compatible with the Humax

3)A method for extracting SRT files from a Humax *.TS file has been documented on the Hummy.tv forum [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/quick-guide-to-extract-dvb-subtitles-from-ts-hd-file-and-convert-to-srt-in-minutes.6625/ '''HERE''']

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mail host or mail hub, It will not handle incoming E-Mail

==Status==

A Command line (Telnet) command that shows what the Humax is (and will be) doing, e.g. :-

<pre>
humax# status
Recording Pretty Woman_20121201_2310
Watching 12: Dave - Would I Lie to You? (23:00 - 23:40) [7%]
Will record 'The Omen' on Film4 at 23:15
</pre>
Note :- The same information is also displayed automatically on several Web-If screens e.g. The Main Screen and the Remote screen

==Strace==

Strace (System Trace) is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. It is used to monitor interactions between processes and the Linux kernel, which include system calls, signal deliveries, and changes of process state.

==Stripts==
This utility removes portions of a recording (*.TS File) that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this process will remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

<pre>
Humax TS Stripper Tool v1.4.2, by af123, 2012-18.

Syntax: stripts [options] <input> [output]
-a Analyse an input file.
-A Quickly analyse an input file.
-c Check if there are any EIT packets.
-C Show address of first EIT packet.
-D Dump NTS file.
-E Check if file is encrypted.
-f Also fix PAT packets.
-F Only fix PAT packets.
-T Dump TS file.
-v Verbose.
-X Add bookmarks at programme start/end.
-Z Extract EPG data from recording (incomplete).
-z Analyse entire TS file.
-@ <key> Decrypt recording with <key>.
-/ <key> Check encryption key against recording.
-d [level] Increase debug level or set debug level.
</pre>

 stripts -F filename HI = Fix file

 stripts -f filename HI = remove redundant EIT packets

 stripts -v filename HI = Verbose

 stripts -S filename HI = demux the raw audio stream into a file-name.audio file

'''NOTE'''
Version 1.4.0 and above of strips also has a file decryption facility, this facility works on both Standard Definition and High Definition recordings and does not require Hi-Def recordings to have the 'ENC' flag removed with the Auto-Unprotect package, it does not require a DLNA URL to be allocated or the DLNA server to be running on the Humax, here is an example of a command line decryption using Stripts :-

<pre>
stripts -@@ <input> <output>
stripts -@ 00037831323331323334353637383930 <input> <output>
stripts -/ 00037831323331323334353637383930 <input>
Encryption key is correct for this recording.
</pre>

In the first example above -@@ automatically inserts the Humax's encryption key, if decryption is being carried out on a file recorded on a different Humax unit, this unit's encryption key must be entered as shown in the second example, this key is made up from the hexadecimal MAC address e.g. 00-03-78-bd-11-f3 plus the first 10 digits of the unit's serial number (also in hexadecimal), e.g. 36-33-37-31-30-34-34-39-36-30 = 6371044960

<input> and <output> are full *.ts file names, up to, but not including the .ts

==Swapper==

Swapper is a utility to change the Humax's swap file size to 128

==Sweeper==

Sweeper is a package which re-locates recordings under My Video and files them away automatically for you according to specified criteria, Sweeper can also replicate the Series Filer and flatten packages

There is a comprehensive guide to the Sweeper Graphical User Interface [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

'''Command Line operation'''

Sweeper rules can also be generated manually by editting the /mod/etc/sweeper.conf file, available from Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File editor

Example 1)

 action {move "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (which must exist)

 action {movecreate "archive/miscellaneous"} HI = Move all single files into a folder called archive/miscellaneous (folder will be created)

Example 2)

 lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous} HI = Move single files from channels 70 - 79 to Children/Miscellaneous folder

 action {move _misc} HI = Move all remaining single files into a folder called _misc

Example 3)

 action {movecreate(Test-%genre-%definition-%title-%channel-%lcn-%duration-%timestamp)} HI = Expanded to Test-Entertainment-SD-Tim Minchin and the Heritage...-Channel 4-4-87-20130824233802]

Example 4)

 folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"} HI = Move the contents of a series created folder to an existing sub folder e.g. from /Octonauts to /Children/Octonauts/Series 3

Example 5)

 folder action {fileunder ""} HI = emulates the old seriesfiler package

Example 6)

Notes :-
*lines starting with '#' are comments
*A full list of commands are detailed in the Sweeper Guide [[sweeper | '''HERE''']]

<pre>
# Sweep single Big Bang episodes into the series folder
lcn 4 title "Big Bang" action {move "The Big Bang Theory"}
# Move anything recorded from a children's channel to the Miscellaneous folder
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} duration {>= 90} lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} genre Film lock 1 action {move Children/Films}
lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {move Children/Miscellaneous}
folder title {Octonauts} action {move "Children/Octonauts/Series 3"}
folder lcn {>= 70} lcn {<= 79} action {fileundercreate Children}
title {Formula 1} action {move F1}
</pre>

==Subtitles==
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#SRT | '''See SRT''']]

==Swifi==

A utility that can retrieve and display your current Wi-fi configuration, it's location is :- /sbin/swifi

==Sysmon==
[[File:HDD-Temp.png|right|150px]]
[[File:CPU.png|right|150px]]
[[File:network.png|right|150px]]
A System Monitoring Utility, the Web-If main page has a System Monitoring icon, selecting this icon displays the following options :-

*Hard Disk Temperature

Displays a graph showing the hard disk temperature, This feature uses the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Smartmontools | '''Smartmontools''']]
package, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days. All graphs have a zoom feature which is implemented with a mouse 'click / drag' or a touchscreen 'pinch / expand'

*CPU Utilisation

Displays a graph showing CPU Utilisation for Idle, Wait, User and System, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

*Network Utilisation

Displays a graph showing Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors, options are to display last 2 / 5 hours or 1 / 10 / 30 Days

The data used to build the graphs is held in file /mod/monitor/monitor.db, currently the tables include :-
#SMART = Hard disk sector relocation information (Not currently displayed as a graph)
#Temp = the Hard Disk Temperature information
#Vmstat = CPU Utilisation data for Idle, Wait, User, System
#Net = Network Utilisation for Inbound, Outbound, In-Errors and Out-Errors
#State = state (Not currently displayed as a graph)

'''Note''' You can reset the database with Web-If >> Diagnostics >> sysmon/purge >> Run Diagnostic

==TCL Check==

Utilities for syntax checking TCL (or Jim) files

==Tcpfix==

This package Modifys the TCP stack to fix download problems that appears to be related to RFC1323 TCP window scaling in the Linux 2.6.18 kernel that the Humax uses

==TCP Ping==

Simple TCP ping utility.

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html '''PuTTY'''], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

It is also possible to use Telnet supplied in some versions Microsoft Windows e.g. Start >> Run >> CMD >> Telnet

See ''' RED ''' set-up notes below, to prevent errors when entering text

Telnet is available in Windows XP, However Vista and Windows 7 will require Telnet to be enabled with Control Panel >> Programs and Features >> Turn Windows Features On / Off >> 'Tick' Telnet

Follow [[Telnet |'''THIS LINK''']] for more details on the various ways of obtaining a Telnet connection

Here is an example of Windows XP Telnet for ls -al 

<pre>
C:\> telnet

Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client Escape Character is 'CTRL + ]'

open 10.0.0.200

humax# ls -al
total 17
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 .
drwxr-xr-x 18 root root 192 Jan 10 09:10 ..
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 474 Jan 10 09:10 bin
.......
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 88 Jan 10 09:10 var
humax#

to exit from humax# enter Ctrl + d

Microsoft Telnet >
to exit from Telnet enter q
C:\>
</pre>

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*''' [Putty] Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' '''
*''' [Windows] Telnet >> unset crlf '''
*The Humax has a Built-In Telnet Welcome Screen, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Tmenu | '''Tmenu''']] for details

==Telnet Commands==

The majority of Unix / Linux command line keywords can be used on the Humax, if you are not familiar with them, there are a few of the more basic commands and their meanings here :-
* cd = change directory, used to navigate around the file structure
* cd "/media/My Video" = navigate to the top level of My Video
* pwd = print working directory, tells you where you are in the file structure
* ls -al = list contents of the current directory
* touch "/media/My Video/dummy.ts" = create an empty file called dummy.ts in the My Video directory

==Tempmon==

This package checks the HDD temperature every three minutes and will raise a warning if a configurable thresholds is exceeded, the warning is displayed on the HDR-Fox T2's front panel and the centre 'button' flashes. The Setting >> Tempmon page shows the current Hard Disk temperature and has defaults as follows :- Alert If = 50, Attempt to go into standby if = 60 and Immediate power off If = 70 Deg C

'''Note''' If the Fan package is not installed the normal Humax routine will turn the fan on at 56 Deg C, so it is suggested that 'Alert If' should be set to 60 Deg C and the other two parameters are set to 65 and 70 Deg C

==Text Editors==

There is a built-in GUI Text editor in the Web-If (details [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#File Editor |'''HERE''']]). In addition to this editor, There is a basic version of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vi |'''Vi''']] built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (not in the Busybox version included in the vendor's firmware). There are also several packages that can be installed to suit your editing preferences e.g. [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Basic |'''Vim Basic''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Vim_Standard | '''Vim Standard''']], [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Joe | '''Joe''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Nano | '''Nano''']].

If you've only installed the basic custom firmware (using the upgrade path with USB), then there's
[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sed | '''sed''']]

==Tmenu==

This built-in package adds a menu to the Telnet Login screen Menu

Enter 0000 for system PIN. Note:- this is the default
<pre>
Menu Version 1.13
Enter System PIN :

/-------------------------\
| T E L N E T M E N U |
\-------------------------/

[ Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03 ] or [Humax HD-Fox T2 (humaxhd) 1.02.29/2.15]

1 - Restart into maintenance mode.
2 - Remove web interface password.
stat - Show what the box is currently doing.
x - Exit and close connection.
rset - Reset custom firmware environment.
srma - Set return-to-manufacturer (RMA) mode.
diag - Run a diagnostic.
cli - System command line (advanced users).

Please select option:

</pre>

NOTE :- It is possible to skip the above Menu and go directly to the Command Line Interface by selecting Expert mode telnet server = On in the Web-If >> Settings >> Advanced Settings

==Tnftp==

The Humax HDR has a built-in FTP Server for transfer of files from Humax to a remote client and an improved FTP Server called [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd|'''Betaftpd''']] to replace it in the HDR, and to add it to the HD, the Tnftp package provides an FTP Client for file transfer from a remote FTP server to the Humax

tnftp is a port of the NetBSD FTP client.

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

The Transmission program will download files from the internet using the a torrent protocol, Downloads using this system are usually fed from multiple sites at the same time in parallel, Because of this many URL’s may be used in the download process, These URLs are packaged together into a single *.torrent file, Transmission re-constructs fragments of the file/s from these various URLs into their original format.

Transmission needs to be supplied with the *.Torrent file, it does not have a Torrent file search facility, one possible torrent source is torrentz.eu, download your selected *.Torrent file to the P.C. you run the Web-iF from

For command line access enter :-

 transmission-remote 

/mod/etc/transmission/settings.json contains settings such as default = speed-limit mode, this can be changed to fast downloading etc. settings info. [https://trac.transmissionbt.com/wiki/EditConfigFiles '''HERE''']

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window and highlight the previously downloaded *.torrent file
*When highlighted select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately
* A new directory will be created at /media/ My Video/torrent/ containing successful downloads

===Blocklist===

The torrent system is a 'two-way' process which can allow other users to access your downloaded files, this access can cause a security risk and it is suggested that a block list is set up to prevent this, the Block list contains a set of IP address's not allowed access.

To create or add to a blocklist go to Transmission >> Preferences (Bottom left 'Spanner') >> Peers >> Blocklist and Enable Blocklist, then go to a block list site such as http://www.iblocklist.com/lists.php and copy an Update URL e.g. http://list.iblocklist.com/?list=bt_level1&fileformat=p2p&archiveformat=gz from there to the Block list URL box and click on Update, This process can be repeated to build up bigger lists

It is also possible to place *.txt files containing blocklists into the /mod/etc/transmission/blocklists folder, these files must be smaller than 5Mbs, They will be processed by the Transmission program when first run and *.bin files will be created in the same folder, if the files are successfully processed an indication of the number of ‘Blocked’ URL will be displayed e.g. Block List Has 598940 Rules

'''Notes'''
*When the block lists are initially being converted into *.bin files, transmission uses an excessive amount of CPU time, this could cause errors in recording, so it is suggested that this is done when the Humax is idle.

==Trm==

Trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==TSTools==

A set of tools for manipulating TS files, they include :-
[[File:Tstools.jpg|left|400px]]

==TTYSnoop==

TTYSnoop allows you to snoop on login tty's through another tty-device or pseudo-tty. The snoop-tty becomes a 'clone' of the original tty, redirecting both input and output from/to it.

==Tunefix==
[[File:tunefix.png|right]]
Tunefix restores a user's settings after a retune has been run, the 5 Keywords are :-

*'''REGION''' to be used (channels from other regions will be removed)
*'''LCN''' (s) by number and/or range will be removed
*'''NAME''' services by name will be removed
*'''MUX''' (s) (all channels from these MUXs will be removed)
*'''FORCE''' named services to the correct LCN

'''Note''' Multiple Regions, LCNs, MUXs are separated by commas

==Tunefix Update==

Automatic channel deletion and fixing after a retune.

==TV Diary==

tvdiary is an add-on to the web interface. It tracks the TV programs you record and watch, and presents a diary view through the web interface, See Full Guide[[ TV_Diary | '''HERE''']]

==Uinput==

User-space input kernel module

==Unencrypt==

New Note:- This package is no longer supported, with the addition to the Web-If of [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Auto-Dedup|'''auto-decrypt''']] and [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Enable_Recursive_Auto-Decrypt|'''recursive auto-decrypt''']] these new functions are recommended in place of Unencrypt due to them being more robust and having more sanity checks

The function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are decrypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Telnet|'''Telnet''']] enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
* '''Due to CPU overloading this feature only works between 1AM and 6AM the Humax must be out of standby during this time using an Auto On / Auto off timer''' 

*It is possible to change when Unencrypt runs by editing the cron job that controls it, Via the Web-If goto Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> /mod/var/spool/cron/crontabs/ and replace 1-6 with a * to force an Unecrypt start every 30 Mins. that the Humax is out of stand-by
<pre>
1,31 * * * * /mod/sbin/unencrypt "/mnt/hd2/My Video/archive" > /mod/tmp/unencrypt.log 2>&1
</pre>

*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*[[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] must = on e.g. Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings

See Decryption flow chart [[Encryption | '''HERE''']]

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

Settings can be changed in :- Web-If >> Settings >> Undelete Settings, e.g. :-

*Dustbin Name
*Remove files from dustbin after 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,10,15,20 days
*Reduce retention time to 0 days if disk space < 10GiB (configurable)

A Log records delete activity at /mod/tmp/empty_dustbin.log

Setting are contained in /mod/webif/plugin/undelete/user.conf

==Version==

Command line (Via Telnet) utility to display various Web-If version numbers, e.g. :-
<pre>
humax# version

Humax HDR Fox T2 (humax)
Humax Version: 1.03.12 (kernel HDR_CFW_3.00)
Custom firmware version: 3.00 (build 2137)
Web interface version: 1.2.1
Serial Number: 12 3456789 12345

humax#
</pre>

==Vfdtest==
[[File:front-icons2.png|right|200px]]

This utility turns on all segments of the Humax front display (Vacuum Fluorescent Display)

Web-If >> Diagnostics >> Run Diagnostic >> vfdtest (available in pull down menu). This will force the display to set all segments to 'on' for 30 seconds, followed by all segments off

'''NOTE:- ''' normal display will return after the Humax is placed in standby

Command Line Version :-

 vfdtest on HIDE Set Display to All segments On

 vfdtest off HIDE Set Display to All Segments off

==Vi==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]. A basic version of Vi is built into the custom [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#BusyBox |'''Busybox''']] package (it's not included in the version of Busybox in the vendor's firmware).

==Vim Basic==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Vim Standard==

Text Editor, See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Text_Editors | '''Text Editors''']]

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared. Any copy to Virtual Disk MUST be by Remote Control OPT+ copy for decryption to take place

'''Note:- For new installations, Virtual-Disk2 is now recommended in place of this package'''

==Virtual-Disk2==

The original Virtual-Disk package (See Above) required a physical USB drive to be in place before the virtual drive could be seen, this new version removes this requirement by creating a drive called 'Virtual-USB', as with a 'real' USB drive, you will get an on-screen display each time the system is started, giving USB options

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Backup/Restore Schedule===
[[File:Backup.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Backup / Restore Scheduled Recordings / Events

This feature provides an automatic daily backup of recording schedule, It is also possible to force an extra manual backup at any time. Any stored backups can then be selected for restoration from the backup folder e.g. /mod/var/backup/auto-2013-Feb-22-18:06.rbk

===Change Channel===

Web-If >> EPG >> Grid Style or Now and Next >> Click on a Channel Logo icon

A Change Channel? question box will pop-up, if you click on 'Yes' the Humax will change the 'Live' tuned channel to the selected channel

Note :- This option requires that the ir Custom Firmware package is installed

===Change Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Series Recording) >> Change Folder

Allows the name of a Series Recording folder to be changed, not valid on a single recording

===Cleanup Old Recording (Schedules)===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Cleanup Old Recordings (at the bottom of the screen)

Allows all entries in the schedule that have no Start Time to be deleted, Humax normally auto-deletes these entries after 12 Weeks.

'''Note:-''' As the EPG is only 7/8 days long caution should be used when deleting scheduled entries that are transmitted less frequently e.g. fortnightly

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files / Folders can be temporarily held in while a new destination is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Create Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> More >> Create Folder

Create a new folder destination for future recordings, See also [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Change_Folder | ''' Change Folder]] where you can change the default folder name

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===
[[File:crop.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Delete===

Remove file, folder, item from a recording schedule etc., depending on where the option is encountered

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file to an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTES:-
* both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted
* Decrypt requires [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Content_Sharing |'''Content sharing''']] to be turned on

===De-duplicate / Tidy this folder===
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also separate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also separate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Detect Adverts===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Detect Adverts

Add bookmarks to a recording where adverts are detected, so that they can be cropped

===Disable AR===

Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> (Click on 'More' for a Recording) >> Disable AR

Allows the default [[Padding_versus_Accurate_Recording|'''Accurate Recording''']] feature to be replaced with Padding on a 'per-recording' basis, in a further drop down menu start and stop padding times can be entered

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decryption an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be associated with a program such as a media player on your P.C., If it is, Remove the association
# Your browser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Enable Auto-Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Audio

Automatically extract an MP3 audio file from all recordings placed in this folder

===Enable Auto-Dedup===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Dedup

Set contents of a folder for Auto-De-Duplication of files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Dedup_.28Command_Line.29 |'''Dedup''']])

===Enable Auto-Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Decrypt

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Decryption of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Decrypt |'''Decrypt''']])

===Enable Auto Expire===
[[File:autoexp.png|200px|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Expire

Automatically delete files in a selected folder a pre-set number of days after recording e.g.1 to 999 days or when above a total number of recordings, Note :- If the Undelete package is installed, the files will be placed in the [Deleted folder] first

===Bookmarks===
[[File:bookmarks.png|right|150px]]
Add, remove and edit bookmarks manually

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Bookmarks

===Enable Auto-MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-MPG

Automatically extract MPG copys of the *.TS files in the same folder, the MPG versions strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files
===Enable Auto-Shrink===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Enable Auto-Shrink

Set contents of a folder for Auto-Shrinking of TS files every 10 Mins. (See also [[#Shrink_.28stripts.29 |'''Shrink''']])

===Enable Recursive Auto-Shrink===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Decrypt===

As above but it but it also works on all folders below the selected folder

===Enable Recursive Auto-Dedup (command line)===

NOTE :- This is not available from the Web-If as it may not be a good idea. Not all series are amenable to auto-dedup and if the broadcaster uses the same programme title for each episode then all but one will be flagged as duplicates.

However, if you wish, you can enable this option from the command line by creating an .autodedupr file, e.g.

touch "/mod/My Video/Kids/.autodedupr" 

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)
*The extracted MP3 file is in a format sometimes called MPEG-2 Audio, not the more common Layer 3 audio, although some MP3 players will accept this format, a greater number of MP3 players require the layer 3 format, transcoding to layer 3 is not carried out on the Humax due to amount of CPU usage required

===Extract To MPG===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract To MPG

This function will produce an MPG copy of the *.TS file in the same folder, the MPG version strips out control frames relating to things which were on the same Mux as the recorded program, resulting in a smaller file. The following conditions must be met :-

*The file must be decrypted (Displays a DEC against it)
*ffmpeg package must be installed
*Extract to MPG is only available from Standard Definition Files

===Enable Auto-mpg===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Folder) >> OPT+ >> Enable Auto-mpg

As above but working on every file in a selected folder

===File Editor===

Web-If MAIN >> Diagnostics >> File Editor >> Open >> [Navigate to desired file]

===Lock===

Mark a file as locked, e.g. protected against deletion

===Mark as Watched===

Tag a file with a 'Watched' symbol

===Manual Event===
[[File:manual-event.png|thumb|right]]
Web-If MAIN >> Scheduled Events >> Manual Event

Allows the set up of a manual recording or reminder, options include:-
*Create : One-off, Daily, weekly,Weekday, Weekend
*Create : Recording or Reminder
*From : Date/Time to: Date/Time
*Channel : Number / Name
*Event Title : Defaults to Channel Name

===Multi Mode Recording===

This option built into the Web-If allows the user to enable a mix of both Accurate Recording and Padding on a per program basis, See [[Multi-mode_Recording|'''Guide Here''']]

===Network Settings===
[[File:network-settings.png|thumb]]
Web-If MAIN >> Settings >> Network Settings

This option provides a Web-If alternative to entering Ethernet Interface and Wireless Interface parameters into the standard Humax Settings screen. The Web-If Wireless Interface screen has several advantages over the standard Humax one e.g :-
*Allows a wider range of ascii characters e.g. "%#<>" to be entered for passwordphrases
*Overcomes time restrictions when entering long passphrases / Keys
'''Notes'''
*Web-If 1.2.0-3 or later must be running
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected, run /sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']]
*To enable a wireless network when an Ethernet cable is connected and Wireless Helper is installed run /mod/sbin/wifi-up from [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#CLI |'''CLI''']] to shutdown the Ethernet interface when bringing up the wireless interface

===New Folder===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> New Folder

Creates a new empty folder, into which recorded files can be moved

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

[[File:Webif-media-detail.png|100px|thumb|right]]

===Play===

This function provides an in-browser playback function for the Humax, It requires that you have the VLC plug-in installed for your browser

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Click on Single File) >> Play

===Rename (File)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Click on Single File) >> Rename

Enables the following fields to be changed / added to a single file :-

*New Filename
*New Medialist Title
*New Synopsis
*New Guidance Text
*New Genre

===Rename (Folder)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Rename

Enables a folder to be re-named

===Reset New Flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> Reset New Flag

Mark a Folder as containing new material

===Save Last Streamed Content===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of any content that has been viewed using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube and place it into the 'My Video' folder. The Telnet equivalent Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

NOTE:- The Portal screen must remain open until the entire file has been downloaded (It is not performed in the background), The amount of time the download takes will vary with broadband speed

===Set Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Set Thumbnail

Change the current on-screen Thumbnail picture for one of 5 pictures covering a 2.5 Second time frame, the centre frame time can be offset from 0 - 99999 seconds, there is also a -30, -5, +5 and +30 second 'nudge' that can be added to the offset.

'''Notes'''
* The Set Thumbnail option will be greyed out if the file is not decrypted first
* High Definition files have 3 pictures covering a 1.5 Second time frame
* Thumbnails may take some time to generate on Hi-Def Files
* If a bookmark is present the thumbnail selections will centre on it

===Sidecar Files===

see [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Sidecar | '''Sidecar''']]

===Split===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Split (45m parts)

This Function (only available on files over 4GB) will split the file into 45 Minute parts with a 2 Minute overlap, It can be used to stream large files without hitting the 4GB stream bug present on the Humax.

The New files will have segment numbering e.g. 1/3. E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial

===Shrink (stripts)===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Shrink

Clicking on Shrink in the OPT+ menu lets you remove portions of a recording that aren't required and can account for up to 20% of its space, this option uses the stripts package to remove freeview EIT packets from the recording, it also updates the associated .nts sidecar file on the fly so that the trick play functions still work on the resulting recording

===Sweeper Rules===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Sweeper Rules

View / Edit the Sweeper Rules for this folder. Note this option will only be displayed if the sweeper package is installer

===Toggle no-sweep flag===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> Folder >> OPT+ >> Toggle no-sweep flag

Disable / enable the sweeper rule generated for this folder

===View Thumbnail===

Web-If MAIN >> Browse Media Files >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> View Thumbnail

View current on-screen Thumbnail picture

==Web-IF Channel Icons==

A set of PNG picture files used to display the T.V. channel icons in the Web-Interface, they reside in /mod/var/mongoose/html/img/channels

==Webif-Charts==

Chart modules for the web interface

==Webif-iphone==

A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==Webif Style Sheet==

The web interface allow you to set your own style overrides in a style sheet file called EXTRA.css, it is located at /mod/webif/html/css/EXTRA.css and is selectable from the Web-If >> Diagnostics >> File Editor drop down menu. Lines added to this file can change some aspects of how the Web Interface is presented to the user e.g. the following lines will prevent genre, guidance (all occurrences) or channel icons being displayed :-
<pre>
img.genre { display: none; }
img[src^="/img/Guidance"] { display: none; }
img.browsechannel { display: none; }
</pre>

Change the size of the pie chart:-

<pre>
#tbdiskpie
{
width: 100px;
height: 100px;
}

.tbdiskpie
{
top: 7px !important;
}
</pre>

Add Borders to Web-If Pages :-
<pre>
table.schedule { border-spacing: 2px; }
table.schedule tr > * { border: 1px solid; }
</pre>

Change font colour or size :-
<pre>
table.schedule td * { color: black; }
table.schedule td { font-size: 1.1em; }
</pre>

Change Icon size
<pre>
img.button { height: 50px; }
</pre>

Remove EPG 'Go to Top' arrow :-

<pre>
#toTop, #toTopHover
{
background: transparent !important;
display: none !important;
opacity: 100 !important;
}
</pre>

Remove EPG ENC icons

<pre>
img.epgenc { display: none; }
</pre>

==Webshell==

After installing this package, an extra icon will be added to the Main Menu >> Diagnostics page at the bottom right, after a re-boot, this will allow access to a Humax Command line similar to using Telnet access

==webm==

This is an audiovisual media file format, if you download files in this format from YouTube (See Youtube-dl), the video and audio may be separated into two files, It is possible to merge these files using ffmpeg, if you download the *.webm video only file and rename it in_vid.webm and download the *.m4a file and rename it in_aud.m4a then the following ffmpeg command line will merge them for you :-
<pre>
ffmpeg -i in_aud.m4a -i in_vid.webm -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
</pre>

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

Note:- There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version

==Wireless Helper==

Wireless network helper - brings wireless up even when just booted to make a recording. Helps with communications to the Remote Scheduling server via USB Wi-Fi dongle

==WOL==

Wakeup On Lan is a feature that can be used to take out of stand-by any item on the LAN that will respond to it. The 'Magic Packet' is broadcast over the LAN e.g. it is sent to every IP address and uses the unique MAC address of the unit to identify which unit is to be woken-up. From Telnet send the following command line where 00:01:02:03:04:05 must be replaced by the MAC address of the item to be woken, e.g.
<pre>
ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05
</pre>
To add this feature to the Humax start-up enter the following from Telnet :-
<pre>
echo /mod/bin/busybox/ether-wake 00:01:02:03:04:05 > /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
chmod 755 /mod/etc/init.d/S30wol
</pre>
NOTES:-
*WOL is also built into [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Network_Shares_Automount|'''Network_Shares_Automount''']]
*The Humax itself cannot be switched out of Standby using Wake-up On Lan, as the LAN connector is not powered during Stand-by

==Xtra1 Portal==

See Guide [[Custom_TV_Portal| '''HERE''']]

==Youtube-dl==

This pacakage uses a command line to download videos from youtube.com or other video platforms, in the following example, a 4K test video is downloaded from YouTube :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
</pre>

The above downloads a 720 line version of the file which is pretty useless when testing 2176 lines, however it is possible to list all available video formats using the -F option :-

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -F https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[info] Available formats for SlLFOrWvY_M:
format code extension resolution note
249 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 50k, 26.87KiB
250 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @ 70k, 26.87KiB
251 webm audio only DASH audio 3k , opus @160k, 26.87KiB
171 webm audio only DASH audio 6k , vorbis@128k, 22.21KiB
140 m4a audio only DASH audio 145k , m4a_dash container, mp4a.40.2@128k, 932.03KiB
278 webm 256x144 144p 34k , webm container, vp9, 13fps, video only, 184.31KiB
242 webm 426x240 240p 44k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 248.03KiB
160 mp4 256x144 144p 50k , avc1.42c00c, 13fps, video only, 257.52KiB
134 mp4 640x360 360p 74k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 417.64KiB
243 webm 640x360 360p 78k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 433.50KiB
133 mp4 426x240 240p 87k , avc1.4d4015, 25fps, video only, 480.96KiB
244 webm 854x480 480p 116k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 633.67KiB
135 mp4 854x480 480p 117k , avc1.4d401e, 25fps, video only, 656.08KiB
136 mp4 1280x720 720p 191k , avc1.4d401f, 25fps, video only, 1.04MiB
247 webm 1280x720 720p 203k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.08MiB
137 mp4 1920x1080 1080p 312k , avc1.640028, 25fps, video only, 1.71MiB
248 webm 1920x1080 1080p 357k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 1.89MiB
271 webm 2560x1440 1440p 609k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 3.20MiB
313 webm 3840x2160 2160p 1122k , vp9, 25fps, video only, 5.88MiB
17 3gp 176x144 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2@ 24k, 272.97KiB
36 3gp 320x180 small , mp4v.20.3, mp4a.40.2, 1004.79KiB
43 webm 640x360 medium , vp8.0, vorbis@128k, 589.88KiB
18 mp4 640x360 medium , avc1.42001E, mp4a.40.2@ 96k, 1.61MiB
22 mp4 1280x720 hd720 , avc1.64001F, mp4a.40.2@192k (best)
</pre>

you can then select the required version of the video with the -f option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
</pre>

NOTE:- the required download file is named *.webm this file won't be visible from the remote control OPT+ copy/move lisings, but is visible via Telnet / FTP etc., you can rename the file to something like 4K-test.mp4 before viewing directly on your 4K TV (not via the HD only Humax)

To combine video only and audio only files into a single file use the following option

<pre>
Humax2# youtube -f "313+171" https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlLFOrWvY_M

[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading webpage
[youtube] SlLFOrWvY_M: Downloading video info webpage
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm
[download] 100% of 5.88MiB in 00:12
[download] Destination: /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm
[download] 100% of 22.21KiB in 00:00
[ffmpeg] Merging formats into "/mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.webm"
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f313.webm (pass -k to keep)
Deleting original file /mnt/hd2/My Video/TobyFree.com - 4K UHD Test Pattern H.264 MP4.f171.webm (pass -k to keep)
</pre>

Youtube-dl has a config file at :- /mod/etc/youtube-dl.conf

Full reference notes are here :-

[https://github.com/rg3/youtube-dl/blob/master/README.md#readme '''Github Notes''']

==Zeroconf==

mDNS Responder, Will create a humax.local name which can be seen by anything running mDNS

After installation the zeroconf package will participate in mDNS-like traffic so you can access the box by name from most operating systems. On some, like Apple and Linux, you would access it as humax.local (assuming humax is the hostname) and on others, like Windows, you can just use humax. Windows can also pick up the name to IP address mapping if you have Samba installed and running.

==Zip==

zip utilities for compressing files :-
<pre>
Humax HDR-Fox T2 (humax) 1.03.12/3.03

humax# zip
Copyright (c) 1990-2008 Info-ZIP - Type 'zip "-L"' for software license.
Zip 3.0 (July 5th 2008). Usage:
zip [-options] [-b path] [-t mmddyyyy] [-n suffixes] [zipfile list] [-xi list]
The default action is to add or replace zipfile entries from list, which
can include the special name - to compress standard input.
If zipfile and list are omitted, zip compresses stdin to stdout.
-f freshen: only changed files -u update: only changed or new files
-d delete entries in zipfile -m move into zipfile (delete OS files)
-r recurse into directories -j junk (don't record) directory names
-0 store only -l convert LF to CR LF (-ll CR LF to LF)
-1 compress faster -9 compress better
-q quiet operation -v verbose operation/print version info
-c add one-line comments -z add zipfile comment
-@ read names from stdin -o make zipfile as old as latest entry
-x exclude the following names -i include only the following names
-F fix zipfile (-FF try harder) -D do not add directory entries
-A adjust self-extracting exe -J junk zipfile prefix (unzipsfx)
-T test zipfile integrity -X eXclude eXtra file attributes
-y store symbolic links as the link instead of the referenced file
-e encrypt -n don't compress these suffixes
</pre>

DetectAds

2018-02-23T08:37:13Z

Black Hole: Added requirement for Content Sharing to enable decryption

[[file:Detectads.png|left|x32px|Icon]]
= DetectAds - Eliminate watching the commercial breaks! =
== Overview ==
[[file:DetectadsRemote.jpg|right|x500px|Bookmark button arrowed]] If you are fed up with watching all of commercials for this, that, and the other or you are an habitual user of the fast forward/skip buttons on the remote when an ad break starts then DetectAds is the package for you!

DetectAds analyses a recording to detect the commercial breaks and places bookmarks at the start (optional) and end of each break so that you can just use the Bookmark button (arrowed in picture) to jump instantly to the next bookmark. Alternatively you can leave the remote languishing between the sofa cushions and have DetectAds physically remove the commercials and EPG data from the recording shrinking the recording size considerably.
__TOC__
== Installation ==
DetectAds is in the Packages catalogue. Chaseget, ir and some other packages used by DetectAds will be installed/upgraded automatically as needed.

In common with all processes that manipulate the recording file, DetectAds needs to work on a decrypted file or to decrypt the file itself. For this, the minimum requirement is to ensure Content Sharing is enabled via ''Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Setting >> Content Share = On''. This setting can be enforced using the ''bootsettings'' package. Note that DetectAds does not require the ''auto-unprotect'' package installed to be able to process HD recordings. For more information regarding the need for, and implementation of, decryption see [[Encryption]] or [https://hummy.tv/forum/threads/using-fox-t2-recordings-with-plex-media-server.2003/#post-25775 Decryption Guide (hummy.tv forum)].

== Automatic Processing ==
Traditionally automatic webif packages have been run sequentially on completed recordings under the control of the "auto" process which ran at fixed intervals. DetectAds can be run in this mode triggered from auto when auto-decryption completes.

Recent enhancements have improved the speed of this post-processing by triggering auto when a recording ends and allowing decryption to start before the system has DLNA indexed the recording but it still takes a significant time to sequentially run a number of processes on a recording.

DetectAds is an exceptionally slow process taking about 15 minutes to process an hour of SD recording which means that with the time to decrypt recording and perform crop there is a considerable delay before a fully processed recording is available for viewing.

DetectAds now introduces as an option a radically different processing model, with "Detect whilst recording" (also known as Chaserun) the detection process runs in parallel with the actual recording so the processing completes within a few seconds of the recording finishing. You can even,[[DetectAds#Chase_playing|with some limitations]], start to watch your program adfree whilst it is still recording.

With both processing modes you can choose to exclude certain commercial free channels such as BBC and Radio stations from processing (Ads on radio stations are not recognized by DetectAds)

Some users have reported that when the system is exceptionally busy such as when recording multiple HD channels and playing other recordings that running DetectAds can cause Picture and Sound breakups on the current recordings, if you experience such problems you can limit the amount of CPU used by the processor intensive part of DetectAds or / and defer processing until the system is quieter.

=== Detect whilst recording -Chaserun processing ===
Ad detection requires a decrypted recording to process so when detecting while recording is in progress there can be three copies of the recording in existence simultaneously: The encrypted input file, the decrypted intermediate file and the cropped & shrunk output file.

To disambiguate between the various files in both the webif and the standard Humax TV interface DetectAds adds the qualifier -dec to the file name and the word Decrypt to the programme title for the decrypted file and adds the qualifier -crop to the file name and the word Crop to the program title for the cropped file.

At the end of recording the input files will normally be deleted and the output renamed to the original file name and title.
File renaming will not take place if any of the following is true:
* The "Dustbin/delete original recording after processing?" option is set to NO
* The Input or Output files are Inuse (e.g. being played or processed by another task)
* There is a length error detected (see below)

There is a small chance that there will be a failure in the retrieval of the decrypted file resulting in a file that is longer or shorter than it should be. This seems to occur if the system is DLNA indexing the recording whilst it is being retrieved. Since retrieval is usually within 30 seconds of actual recording it is a rare event and usually only affects the closing credits/ trailing ads. If it does occur the input recording will be left in situ and not replaced by the -dec (which will be deleted) or -crop files (which will be kept, If the length error is significant, more than 30 seconds long, the input file will be automatically queued to retry ad detection since it is unlikely to recur again.

[[file:DetectadsNotification.jpg|right|Notification Message]]
It is also possible that a poor quality recording due to low strength or transmission glitches will cause the detection process to drop frames resulting in an apparently shorter recording leading to misplaced bookmarks and cropping.

If either form of length error is detected a system notification message is generated to warn you that bookmarks and cropping maybe unreliable, the input file is not deleted and -Len err is appended to the title of the -crop file (if auto cropping is active)

The DLNA server is not active in half-awake recording state so ChaseGet uses the IR package to force the system fully awake if needed.
After the recording ChaseGet will now (chaseget version 0.1.1_1) attempt to turn power off when it it safe to do so but it is not easy to determine if the user has started to watch the TV in the mean time without pressing any buttons on the remote.

To reduce the risk of upsetting important family members when the box shuts down without warning (The Customised Firmware has no ability to put a 2 minute standby warning on screen like the Humax does) you can specify a time range in the [[DetectAds#ChaseGet_settings|ChaseGet Settings]] during which automatic return to standby won't operate.

You can also choose in the settings whether to Mute the sound when ChaseGet does wake the system from standby outside the peak time-range. This would prevent a sudden blast of sound if the system wakes up in the middle of the night for a scheduled recording and the TV has been left on or auto-switches on HDMI activity. A user un-muting the sound also indicates that someone is watching the TV and so ChaseGet would not then return the system to standby.

ChaseGet will return the system to StandBy if during scheduled checks which run every 20 minute all of the following are true.
* The system was awakened from Standby by ChaseGet
* The time is not within the exclusion time range
* The system isn't currently in standby
* No significant programs are running (including auto, detectads etc)- full list is in /mod/etc/chaseget.conf and can be extended if needed
* There are no active PuTTY / Telnet psuedo-terminals
* The system hasn't been been rebooted since wakeup
* No recording is being played (on set or via remote access)
* There is no active Reminder event
* No remote control buttons have been pressed since wakeup

=== Traditional processing ===
Unlike the chaserun processing there is a prerequisite for the file to decrypted first and bookmarks are added to it so there is no output file unless the Crop option is selected, for consistency with chaserun processing deletion of the input depends on the 'Delete input' option. If the input file is not deleted then the output file name is suffixed with -crop.

It is possible that a poor quality recording due to low strength or transmission glitches will cause the detection process to drop frames resulting in an apparently shorter recording leading to misplaced bookmarks. If a significant length error (>5 seconds) is detected a system notification message is generated to warn you that bookmarks maybe unreliable, the recording will not be cropped automatically.

Setting the folder auto-decrypt option is required for the DetectAds process to be trigged but if you are using Flatten or Sweeper to rename/move files between folders it is recommended that the auto-decrypt option only be specified on the target folder to prevent the chance of DetectAds not finding the file because it has been moved.

If you wish wish to defer DetectAds processing to a time when the system is less busy you can specify a target start time on the Setiings page, the target time is the earliest start time but processing may start later depending on when the regular DetectAds task starts and how many other items need to be processed on the queue.
You must of course ensure the the system is switched on at the target processing time and remains on long enough to process all of the queued items (possibly set up a scheduled repeating reminder event)

=== Folder Flags ===

There are two new folder flags Auto DetectAds and No DetectAds

These work in conjunction with the existing Channel exclusions rules so it is not necessary to add the flag to each directory if you use the existing DetctAds Auto processing options (Automatically process whilst recording in progress? (chaserun) or Automatically process recording following auto-decryption? (traditional)

You can also use the Auto DetectAds flag to process exist recordings in a folder.

The Auto DetectAds flag means all recordings in a folder will be processed regardless of the recording channel and whether they have been decrypted.
The No DetectAds flag means none of the recordings in a folder will be processed regardless of the recording channel.
In the absence of a flag recordings will be processed during recording (chaserun) or following decryption (traditional) if they are on a channel that has not been excluded by the channel filters.

If you routinely want to detect ads in all commercial programmes as I do you don't need to use the new flags at all.
If you only want a subset of programmes processed you can use the flags to include/exclude directories overriding the channel filters

For instance you could set No DetectAds on the 'My Videos' root folder to prevent auto ad detection of one-off recordings (I don't recommend setting Auto DetectAds on 'My Videos' since this would override the channel selection filters and cause detection of all one-off recordings including those on BBC channels)

The processing is (deliberately) different from the other auto options where you have to have a flag set before any processing happens.
=== Sweeper ===
Another method of automating DetectAds processing is to set up Sweeper rules to select which recording should be processed by DetectAds. This allows you much finer control of the process than the other automation methods that only allow for exclusion based on channel name or folder. Since Sweeper only processes files once they have completed recording and are not in-use it is inevitably slower than using Detect whilst recording.

When the DetectAds package is installed several new options are added to the Sweeper rules menus. These allow you to:
* Check whether the recording has been flagged as 'Ad-Detection done'
* Check whether the recording has already been queued for detection
* Add the recording to the auto processing queue, optionally specifying the time for processing to start,

To assist with setting up the rules a new sample set has been added to the pre-defined ruleset list. These are shown and explained below.
[[file:DetectadsSweeper.jpg|Sweeper rules page]]

There is one rule in the set.

The rule may need to be modified to meet your own requirements, as supplied it is a file rule (recursive into child folders) that adds to the auto processing queue recordings that, have no bookmarks, have no Addetection flag set, are not on a BBC channel, and are not already on the queue.

If you have other rules that rename or move the recording file they should precede this rule.

If you wish wish to defer DetectAds processing to a time when the system is less busy you can specify current time conditions in the Sweeper rule to ensure recordings are only queued when you want them processed.
You must of course ensure the the system is switched on at the target processing time and remains on long enough to process all of the queued items (possibly set up a scheduled repeating reminder event)

Note: Previous versions of DetectAds provided specific DetectAds queuing actions and conditions which have now been superseded by the standard 'Queue recording for' action, the older actions remain for compatibly with pre-existing rule sets. The -t hh;mm target start time is only supported with the older action.

=== To crop or not to crop - that is the question ===
Detecting ads can never be 100% accurate with the risk of it failing to spot an ad break, incorrectly identifying part of a program as an ad break or mis-positioning the end of break markers.

In over a year of using DetectAds I have seen very few detection errors with just a few failures to spot an ad break so I am happy to allow cropping to take place automatically - the original can always be rescued from the dustbin if needed (I do recommend use of Undelete package for safety)

However everybody's viewing habits differs and the success of DetectAds may vary by channel or program time so it is probably worth not using the 'Delete input' option until you are comfortable that cropping is working for you.

If you do not use auto crop the Bookmarks set by DetectAds will now be automatically 'inverted' to meet nicesplice's requirements removing the need to perform that operation on the Crop menu page before performing the Crop operation manually.

Note: Do not use the "Only Bookmark ends of ad breaks?" if you want to retain the ability to run a manual crop,

== Invoking from Browse or FlexView ==
The Addetection icon is now displayed with the other recording flags in the file list.

To process multiple recordings you can select the recordings, choose 'Ad Detection' from the list and then click on the 'Queue For' button at the bottom of the page. Remember Ad Detection is slow so be be sparing when adding batches of existing recordings to the queue.

To process a single recording you can select "Detect Adverts" from the Opt+ pull down menu on the webif Browse file list.
This will lead you to the main panel where there are two processing options:

;Run Analysis now:This processes the file immediately with the results displayed in the processing routine but due to the length of time taken to analyse a recording it is recommended that this option not be used unless you have a lot of spare time or need to investigate a problem!
;Run Analysis in background:This option adds the recording to the Auto processing queue and returns. The queue is processed sequentially and, if the system is restarted, resumes on restart so if you have a number of recordings to be processed they can be safely added to the queue without waiting for preceding files to finish processing.

If you wish wish to defer DetectAds processing to a time when the system is less busy you can specify a target start time or ASAP on the panel.
The target time is the earliest start time but processing may start later depending on when the regular auto processing task starts and how many other items need to be processed on the queue.
You must of course ensure the the system is switched on at the target processing time and remains on long enough to process all of the queued items (possibly set up a scheduled repeating reminder event)

If the selected recording is already on the queue the two Run buttons are replaced by:
;Remove from background queue:This removes the entry from the processing queue but it does not cancel processing for the recording if it has already started.

If the file has already been decrypted the program will be processed in 'traditional' mode otherwise it will be processed in the new 'chaserun' mode.

[[file:DetectadsBrowseIndex.jpg|left|350px]]
[[file:DetectadsBrowseMain.jpg|350px]]
[[file:DetectadsBrowseRunning.jpg|left|350px]]
[[file:DetectadsRemove.jpg|350px]]

== Command Line ==
DetectAds can also be started from a Telnet command line or from another script which could be useful if you have a batch of existing recordings to be processed.
<pre>
Humax# /mod/webif/plugin/detectads/detectads -h
detectads = Detect ads in recordings and bookmark or crop them

detectads -d parameters = produce debug on Stdout
detectads -h = produce this help
detectads -pq = process queued requests (obsolete)
detectads -aq recording ?-t tgtstart? = add recording to request queue
tgstart = hh:mm or linux time value
detectads -qq recording = query if recording on request queue
detectads -dq recording = delete recording from request queue
detectads -pr recording = process recording now
</pre>
Note: It is not possible to specify all DetectAds options via the command line, use the [[DetectAds#Settings|Settings page]] to set processing options.

If the file has already been decrypted the program will be processed in 'traditional' mode otherwise it will be processed in the new 'chaserun' mode.

== Settings ==
[[file:DetectadsSettings.jpg|Settings page]]

Options specified via the webif Settings section for DetectAds are:
;Automatically process recordings whilst recording in progress? (chaserun):Select the new 'chaserun' processing mode, faster but not yet widely tested
;Automatically process recordings following auto-decryption? (traditional):Select the slower 'traditional' automatic processing following decryption
;Folder flag, Sweeper or No automatic processing of recordings:Select this option if you are using 'Auto Ad detection' folder flags, or Sweeper to control DetectAds or you want no automatic processing.
;Exclude channels from automatic processing:Exclude BBC and other non commercial channels from processing, see below for more details
;Start processing recording queue:Target time to start processing recording queue for Traditional Processing, ASAP or a time of day
;Only Bookmark ends of ad breaks?:Select this option if you use the remote control to skip to the end of ad-breaks and do not need/want bookmarks at the start of ad-breaks. With this option you will not be able to subsequently use Crop manually to delete ad-breaks (without rerunning detection) but you can still use the automatic crop option.
;Crop recording following ad detection?:Automatically run nicesplice to delete the adbreaks and shrink the recording file
;Delete (move to bin) original recording after processing?:Select No if you don't trust the detection/cropping process 100% and want to keep the original around without hunting in the dustbin to find it.
;Write output recording to folder:Choose target for writing output recording, 'Other' can only be a fixed path - if you want to vary the path use the 'Sweeper' package instead
;Limit cpu usage to:Option will only be shown if the cpulimit package has been installed and will limit the cpu usage of the ffmpeg program (cpu hog) to approximately the specified value. This will slow down traditional processing significantly if the percentage is less than 50%, the impact on chaserun is less significant unless you are simultaneously recording two HD channels.
:This support is still experimental and it is not yet known if cpu limiting will reduce drop-outs and other faults - please report findings in the forums.
=== Channel exclusion list ===
[[file:DetectadsExclusionSettings.jpg|Channel exclusion page]]

You can type a generic matching rule such as 'BBC *' in the left hand or ctrl-click on specific channels and then click the ← button to transfer them to the left column.
To remove entries from the left column position the cursor and use delete or backspace keys.

If you record from CBeebies, CBBC, etc I suggest you add them to the exclusion list since they are not covered by the default configuration.
=== ChaseGet settings ===
[[file:DetectAdsChasegetSettings.jpg|ChaseGet Settings]]

Options specified via the webif Settings section for ChaseGet are:
;Hide ChaseGet on status display?:Hide/Show ChaseGet activity on the webif status display
;Mute sound on ChaseGet wake from standby?:Muting the sound prevents unwanted disturbance if the TV is on (or auto switched on) when the system awakes from standby outside peak hours.
N.B. Do not use this option if your remote is programmed to only control TV sound and can't be used to send volume controls to the Humax
;Don't mute or return to standby between and:Use this option to specify your peak viewing times to prevent the box returning to standby without warning while it is possible that family members may be watching.
To prevent ChaseGet ever returning the system to standby specify range as 00:00 to 24:00 
To allow ChaseGet to return system to standby at any time specify the range as 00:00 to 00:00

== Chase playing ==
You can watch the cropped output from the chaserun process whilst recording is still in progress either through the normal TV user
interface or via file sharing using an application such as VLC however there are a number of things to be born in mind.
* You can't remotely access the file via URL, only via file file sharing, there are two reasons for this.
** The output files have not been indexed by the DLNA server and
** the DLNA server only returns the amount of program known at the start of the request and so wouldn't return the entire program
* If you use the skip/fast forward buttons you are liable to run past the end as known by the Humax and playback will terminate prematurely
* If watching the -crop cropped output you have to take into account the total amount of advert breaks to be removed and the lag in producing cropped output. e.g. if you starting watching a program with 15 minutes of ads 10 minutes after it starts you will inevitably catch up with what has been processed before the end of program and playback will end. It would be safer to wait 30 minutes before attempting to start Chase play.
* The full recording length will not be shown in the program information on the TV or via webif. This is because the Humax updates the resume time during playback overwriting the actual recording length in the process.
* File will not be renamed to the original file name when recording finishes.

In general you will get the best Chase play experience viewing the -crop output on TV, starting half way or later through the recording time and leaving the remote control alone once play has started!

== Limitations ==
DetectAds works by detecting the short periods of silence that occur between ads and looks for clusters of these silence to distinguish between ad breaks and natural silences occurring during programmes.

Unfortunately sponsor bumper messages, viewer competitions, news bulletins and some trailers don't always have the necessary silences to allow them to be detected and removed.

Some ad breaks, especially in overnight programs, are too short to be reliably detected.

Ads in radio transmissions are not detected, DetectAds automatic processing will exclude recordings that have the Radio flag set.
== Debugging ==
DetectAds writes a few lines to the recmon.log depending on operating mode but the vast majority of output is written to /mod/tmp/auto.log for queued requests and to /mod/tmp/detectads.log for programmes processed during recording, records from chaseget are written to /mod/tmp/chaseget.log

Logs can be examined using the log viewer on the webif Diagnostics page or a text editor.

The amount of log data written is controlled by the "Auto-processing log level" setting in General Settings on the webif Settings page or specifying the -d option when using the command line interface.

If you experience a power cut or other failure during chaserun processing you may be left with orphaned -dec and -inp files in the /mod/tmp/ directory. These should not cause problems and will automatically be deleted.

== Under the covers ==
In chaserun mode DetectAds sets up a pipeline where the stdout output from one program is fed into the stdin input of the next allowing them to run is parallel reducing overall elapsed time.

[[file:DetectAdsFlow.png|right|Chaserun pipeline flow]]
The stages in the chaserun pipeline are:
;chaseget:This is a newly written jim program to retrieve and decrypt the input recording. It uses the system dlnahelper function to fool the DLNA server into allowing unindexed recordings to be retrieved. Curl is used to retrieve the recording in chunks with the pause between chunks allowing multiple instances of DetectAds when there are simultaneous recordings. Since the DLNA server is not active in half-awake recording state chaseget uses the IR package to force the system fully awake if needed.
;tee:A standard linux utility is used to write the decrypted recording to the -dec file which is the input to the nsplice stage if cropping or the DetectAds output if not cropping.
;ffmpeg:A general purpose audio and video stream processor. Extracts the audio component from the recording.
;silence:Originally created for mythtv it detects commercial breaks by looking for periods of silence and then finding clusters of silences, the algorithm is described on the [https://www.mythtv.org/wiki/Commercial_detection_with_silences Myth TV Commercial_detection_with_silences page]. Only minor changes have been made to sharpen the detection of silences and provide periodic heartbeat messages to help with cropping in the pipeline.
;detectads:Part of the DetectAds jim code analyzes the messages written by silence, updates the bookmarks in the hmt the input & -dec files, and builds cut commands for nicesplice
;nsplice:(optional)This is a version of the nicesplice program modified to accept commands from stdin instead of the command line and to make the output recording visible as it is processed to permit chase playing. The .nts for the -dec file input to splice is a hard link to the .nts for the input recording.

The traditional version of DetectAds has a similar flow except that chaseget & tee are omitted, ffmpeg reads the already decrypted input file directly, The other major difference is that nsplice runs after the pipeline has completed rather than being a pipeline stage.
== Change History ==
{|border=1,
| '''Date'''||'''Version'''||'''Author'''||'''Description'''
|-
|2017-01-30 ||detectads 0.2.4-1|| mymsman || Significant update
* It now uses the system queue for all deferred requests rather than maintaining its own database
* The old queue will be processed if there are outstanding requests on it but no new entries will be added and it will eventually be deleted.
* You can add Ad Detection requests to the queue using the Browse and Sweeper 'Queue for' options
* The old DetectAds Sweeper actions remain for compatibility with existing rules but now use the system queue
* The sample Sweeper rule has been updated to use the 'Queue recording for' action
* There are two new folder flags Auto DetectAds and No DetectAds
** These work in conjunction with the existing Channel exclusions rules so it is not necessary to add the flag to each directory if you use the existing DetctAds Auto processing options (Automatically process whilst recording in progress? (chaserun) or Automatically process recording following auto-decryption? (traditional) )
** You can use these flags to include additional directories (Auto DetectAds) where you want all (including pre-existing recordings) ad detected or exclude directories (No DetectAds) which would otherwise be subject to ad detection based on channel filters.
** For instance you could set No DetectAds on the 'My Videos' root folder to prevent auto ad detection of one-off recordings (I don't recommend setting Auto DetectAds on 'My Videos' since this would override the channel selection filters and cause detection of all one-off recordings including those on BBC channels)
* DetectAds processing can still be deferred to, for example overnight, by setting a target start time on the settings page (remember to leave machine on or set a reminder)
* Logging for Queued requests will now be in auto.log but remain in detectads.log for detect while recording. Chaseget logging will be in chaseget.log.
* Chaserun processing remains a process while recording operation though it does create a temporary queue entry as a safeguard against failures during recording.
|-
|2016-11-16 ||detectads 0.2.3-3 chaseget 0.1.1-6|| mymsman || Minor update
* Show DetectAds and ChaseGet activity in webif status display
* Option on settings menu to hide ChaseGet status display
|-
|2016-05-25 ||detectads 0.2.3-2 chaseget 0.1.1-5|| mymsman || Medium update
* New option to specify target start time for queued requests:
** On Settings page
** On Browse detectads page
** As sweeper parameter -t hh:mm
** via command line -t hh:mm or -t timevalue
* Minor cleanup of settings page
* Sweeper rules restored to Global
* Chaseget now uses system uptime to determine boot time
|-
|2016-03-28 ||detectads 0.2.3-0 chaseget 0.1.1-2|| mymsman || Medium update
* If cpulimit package is installed:
** New settings option to specify limit
** Limits ffmpeg usage to specified value
* Automatic clean up of orphaned files
* Detect and log 'pipe broken' in chaseget
* 'Back to media browser' should work in flexview
* Sweeper rules no longer Global
|-
|2016-03-20 ||detectads 0.2.2-7 || mymsman || Minor update
* Bypass detection for Radio programmes with Radio flag set in hmt
* Remove Radio filter from default configuration.
* Include flexview.hook file
|-
|2015-11-30 ||detectads 0.2.2-6 || mymsman || Minor update
* Automatic restart of detectads following power failures during Detect while recording
* Decryption length failures re-queued after recording ends
* Reduced max ad length to 65 seconds (was 90 sec)
* Heartbeat at cluster start - should improve chase playing
|-
|2015-11-23 ||detectads 0.2.2-5 || mymsman || Minor update
* Avoid too frequent re queuing on repeated decryption length errors
|-
|2015-11-15 ||detectads 0.2.2-3 || mymsman || Minor update
* Fixes the bug that caused misplaced crops when using chaserun on HD files
* Detects when poor quality recording cause a significant (>5 seconds) difference between detected program length and actual program length
* Create System notify messages when errors are detected
|-
|2015-10-28 ||detectads 0.2.2-1|| mymsman || Experimental update
* Use links to input file to 'hide' from DLNA indexing
|-
|2015-10-20 ||detectads 0.2.2-0 chaseget 0.1.1-1|| mymsman || Significant update
* ChaseGet return to standby
* ChaseGet settings page
* 'Inverted' bookmarks
* Retain original file name/title on output file
* Automatic reprocess on significant length error
* Build -dec file in /mod/tmp/ with hard link for .nts
|-
|2015-09-30 ||detectads 0.2.1-6 || mymsman || Minor update
* Recompile Silence to work with updated libsndfile package
* Use -ac 2 option on ffmpeg
* These changes should provide better large file support
|-
|2015-09-26 ||detectads 0.2.1-4 || mymsman || Bug fix
* Fix incorrect dependency
|-
|2015-09-25 ||detectads 0.2.1-3 || mymsman || Bug fix
* Fix for short crop problem
|-
|2015-09-23 ||detectads 0.2.1-2 || mymsman || Bug fix
* Fix exclusion of BBC, more diagnostics for short crop problem
|-
|2015-09-17 ||detectads 0.2.1-1 || mymsman || Minor update
* Show Addetection icon in browse file list (thanks af123)
|-
|2015-09-16 ||detectads 0.2.1-0 || mymsman || Significant update
* Addetection flag in .hmt file (thanks af123)
* Automation via Sweeper (thanks af123)
* Sample Sweeper rules
* Show processing queue, remove entries from queue
* Only Bookmark ends of ad breaks option
* New icon
* Cosmetic improvements
* No deletion of inuse recordings
|-
|2015-09-01 ||detectads 0.2.0-3 || mymsman ||Minor update
* Add ffmpeg and libsndfile to prereq list
* Correct bug if no ad-breaks found
|-
|2015-08-31 ||detectads 0.2.0-2 chaseget 0.1.0-0|| mymsman || Released on package catalogue
* ChaseGet moved to separate package
* .conf & .db moved to /mod/etc/
* Avoid power on loop
* Minor clean up
|-
|2015-08-01 ||detectads 0.2.0-0 || mymsman || Significant update including:
* Channel exclusion
* Background processing from browse panel
* Command line
* Automatic cropping of breaks option
* Detect whilst recording
* Limited distribution
|-
|2014-07-04 ||detectads 0.0.2.2 || njm || Initial version including while you wait webif and process all automation option
|}

== Future Enhancements ==
Possible future enhancements - please suggest more
* User interface to change Silence setting, possibly by channel
* Replace use of ffmpeg for audio extraction

== Acknowledgements ==
;njm:For having the idea of bringing the mythTV ad detection to the Humax and for creating the first version of DetectAds
;mythTV:For producing the Silence ad detecting package [https://www.mythtv.org/wiki/Commercial_detection_with_silences Myth TV Commercial_detection_with_silences]
;oatcake:For coming up with the idea of using symbolic links to allow DLNA access to files that have not yet been DLNA indexed
;af123:For providing the recmon start recording hooks and the webif framework, adding the Addetection flag and Sweeper hooks.
;xyz321:Automatic inversion of bookmarks, libsndfile improvements
;drutt:For creating nicesplice package and permitting me to update the source.
;everbody else:Who has assisted through the forums

Custom Firmware Package Notes

2012-02-03T19:26:55Z

Black Hole: /* Unencrypt */

'''BREIF NOTES FOR CUSTOM FIRMWARE PACKAGES'''
{{Note|Some Functions of the Web Interface are 'Built-In' and do not require an additional package to be installed, These Features are covered in the Web If section of ths page

Some packages require a reboot (Hard disk spin down) before they take effect}}

==Auto-Unprotect==

The Auto Unprotect package runs in the background and automatically removes the Encryption Protected flag on high definition recordings. This is the flag which prevents the file from being decrypted when it is copied to an external disk. On first installation, the hard disk will be scanned for any high definition recordings and they will be unprotected. Thereafter new recordings will have the flag removed as they are completed

NOTE:- the removal of the ENC flag does not decrypt the file, However it does make decyption possible

==Auto-Update==

This package automatically keeps the installed packages up to date by checking for any new releases daily and automatically downloading and installing them, It will check once per day at the earliest power on, for most people probably the 04:30 boot

==Betaftpd==

===For HDR-Fox T2===

The HDR-FOX T2 has a built-in FTP server, This default server will still be in available after the Custom Firmware is installed, However only files under ‘Media’ are visible, Betaftpd has two possible Logins, If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessable. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

NOTE:- The Built-in FTP server must be turned off if Betaftpd is used with Menu >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF

===For HD-Fox T2===

Betaftpd will add an FTP server to the Humax after installation, Betaftpd has two possible Logins, If login = humaxftp and password = 0000 is used then only ‘Media’ is visible. If login = root and password = 0000 is used then the entire file system is accessable. If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==BootHDR==

This Function for the HD-FOX T2 only, Allows the HD-FOX T2 to run the software for the HDR-FOX T2, to allow decryption of recordings by copying to a volume, At present the package needs to be
installed from the command line (Telnet)e.g. :-

 opkg install wget 

 opkg install boothdr --force-reinstall 

==BusyBox==

Your Humax box has a ‘Unix’ operating system, Busybox is a package that provides 158 common Unix commands that can be used in a Telnet sessions, The List below shows the available commands, There is no 'man' command that would explain what they do, but most commands can have a -? or -h extention to get some help e.g. ls -?, A command look up table can be found [http://busybox.net/downloads/BusyBox.html '''HERE''']

NOTE:- It is not a good idea to 'Play' with these commands if you don't know what you are doing

<div style="column-count:8;-moz-column-count:8;-webkit-column-count:8">
*[
*[[
*ar
*arp
*arping
*ash
*awk
*base64
*basename
*bunzip2
*bzcat
*bzip2
*cal
*cat
*catv
*chgrp
*chmod
*chown
*chroot
*cksum
*clear
*cmp
*comm
*cp
*cpio
*cut
*date
*dc
*dd
*df
*diff
*dirname
*dos2unix
*du
*echo
*ed
*egrep
*env
*ether-wake
*expr
*false
*fgrep
*find
*fold
*free
*ftpget
*ftpput
*fuser
*grep
*gunzip
*gzip
*hd
*head
*hexdump
*ifconfig
*insmod
*install
*iostat
*kill
*killall
*killall5
*last
*less
*ln
*logname
*ls
*lsmod
*lsusb
*lzcat
*lzma
*md5sum
*mkdir
*mkfifo
*mknod
*mktemp
*modinfo
*modprobe
*more
*mpstat
*mv
*nc
*netstat
*nice
*nmeter
*nohup
*nslookup
*od
*patch
*pgrep
*ping
*pkill
*pmap
*printenv
*printf
*ps
*pstree
*pwd
*pwdx
*readlink
*realpath
*renice
*rm
*rmdir
*rmmod
*route
*rpm
*sed
*sendmail
*seq
*sh
*sha1sum
*sha256sum
*sha512sum
*sleep
*sort
*split
*stat
*strings
*stty
*sum
*sync
*sysctl
*tail
*tar
*tee
*telnet
*test
*tftp
*time
*top
*touch
*tr
*traceroute
*true
*tty
*uname
*uniq
*unix2dos
*unlzma
*unxz
*unzip
*uptime
*usleep
*uudecode
*uuencode
*vi
*watch
*wc
*wget
*which
*who
*whoami
*xargs
*xz
*xzcat
*yes
*zcat
</div>

==CIFS==

The Common Internet File System. The cifs package provides the Humax with the ability to remotely access files shared from PCs using Windows file sharing. This package adds the support to the running system but mounting remote filesystems must currently be performed from the command line, Example :-

 mkdir /media/NAS 

 mkdir "/media/My Video/NAS" 

 mount -t cifs //server/share /media/NAS -o user=abc,password=def 

 mount -t cifs "//server/share /media/My Video/NAS" -o user=abc,password=def 

==Custom TV Portal==

An extension to the Humax TV Portal thats add some more apps

Full Guide[[Custom_TV_Portal | '''HERE''']]

==Dedup (Command Line)==

The dedup package adds a command line utility which can consolidate recordings within a single folder so that duplicates are removed and the remaining episodes are renamed so that the episode name and number (if available) are displayed in the Media Browser

Note:- There is a 'built-in' version of Dedup in the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Web_IF | '''Web-If ''']] that effectivly replaces the command line package, However if the dedup package is installed it is possible to perform the following Telnet commands from the folder you have navigated to:-

 dedup HIDE lists the recordings there and shows what they would be renamed to

 dedup -yes HIDE perform the changes as detailed below :-

*Renames the files on disk to match the episode name
*Changes the title shown in the media list to match the episode name
*Identifies duplicate episodes and moves them to a sub-folder called dup/

==Disable OTA==

This feature inhibits any Over The Air Software updates that may be transmitted by Humax

==Dropbear SSH==
An SSH server for the Humax. This package provides remote command line access over an encrypted session and is an alternative to using telnet
to gain command line access although it causes the box to do more work

==Edit On Box==

Full Guide for Nicesplice [[Edit_On_Box | '''HERE''']]

==EPG (Command Line)==

EPG information can be obtained from a Telnet Command line e.g.

 epg 

<pre>

humax# epg
Humax EPG Tool v1.0.8, by af123, 2011.

Syntax: epg [options] [filters] <command>...

Options:
-b Brief output.
-d[level] Set debug level.
-f<file> Specify alternate EPG data file.
-h Show help text.
-p Parsable output.

Filters: (can be specified multiple times, all must be true)
-C<CRID> Show only events with this CRID.
-D<descriptor type> Show only selected descriptor type.
-E<event id> Show only selected event.
-R<SCRID> Show only events with this Series ID.
-S<service id> Show only selected service.
-T<content type> Show only selected content types.
-@<unix timestamp> Show only programmes at time.
-/<unix timestamp> Show only programmes on day.
-/<days> Show only programmes on day.
-=<start>:<end> Show only programmes in time period.

Commands:
dump Show a parsed summary of the EPG.
dumpraw Show raw data from the EPG.
sqldump Produce SQL statements from EPG data.
sqlitedump <file> Create SQLite database from EPG data.
now Show what is currently on.
first Show the time of the earliest record.
last Show the time of the latest record.
parse Parse the EPG, no output.
search <text> Search programme names for text.
searchall <text> Search programme names/descriptions for text.
</pre>

==Epg Keywords (Web-If)==

This package is a web interface plugin which allows a list of keywords to be configured and will then periodically send an email to a specified email address detailing any programmes in the EPG which match the keywords

Initial Setup :-
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> Email address >> myname@talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SMTP >> smtp.talktalk.co.uk
*Web-If MAIN >> SETTINGS >> SEND TEST EMAIL

==Flatten==

This feature changes how recorded programs are displayed on screen in the 'Media - My Video' menu, Series of programs are normally grouped into a sub-folder, Flatten will move the contents of sub-folders to the main 'Top' folder and remove empty sub-folders, After installing flatten the Web-If will have an option under OPT+ which lets you toggle directories between flatten and no-flatten

'''NOTE''' :- All directories will default to have flatten turned on unless they are changed

'''Exceptions'''

* Folders marked as no flatten using the OPT+ option will not be flattened
* Folders who's names are bounded by square brackets e.g. [NOT THIS ONE] will not be flattened
* Folders containing a file called .noflatten will not be flattened (Note:- Create this file Via Telnet)

==FTP==

File Transfer Protocol is a method of transferring files to and from your Humax, The Humax HDR-Fox T2 has a built-in FTP for access to the media folders only. See the [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Betaftpd |'''Betaftpd package''' ]] for access to the full Humax file structure or to add an FTP server to the HD-Fox T2. To use FTP on a P.C. a program that handles FTP is required, Internet Explorer and Windows (file) Explorer will allow FTP access by entering ftp://10.0.0.200 into the address bar, Although access may be restricted to media folders only, even when using the Betaftpd package, If access to the whole file structure is required programs like Filezilla or WS_FTP_Pro can be used.

Notes :-
* To use the Built-In Humax FTP server MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = ON
* When using Betaftpd MENU >> Settings >> System >> Internet Settings >> FTP Server = OFF
*10.0.0.200 needs to be replaced with your own Humax IP address
*login = humaxftp
*password = 0000 (your Remote Pin default). If the remote password has been changed from 0000 then the new password must be used

==HMT==

This package displays information on the humax *.hmt file, A small 'sidecar' file created alogside the main *.ts video file

From a Telnet Session, Navigate to a directory containing an *.hmt file, Then enter hmt {filename}

 hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt 

<pre>
humax# hmt KAISER_CHIEFS_DD5_1_20110410_0147.hmt
Format:HD
Title:KAISER CHIEFS DD5.1
Channel:4096 (BBC HD)
Folder:/mnt/hd2/My Video/MY-ARCHIVE/
Filename:KAISER CHIEFS DD5_1_20110410_0147
Genre:Entertainment
EPG:Performance from the Kaiser Chiefs from the Later... with Jools Holland archives.
They play I Predict a Riot, the party and festival anthem of 2005.

Flags: HD,Unlimited Copies,
Copy count:0

Scheduled start:1302396300 (Sun Apr 10 00:45:00 2011)
Scheduled duration:300
Recording start:1302396449 (Sun Apr 10 00:47:29 2011)
Recording end:1302396706 (Sun Apr 10 00:51:46 2011)
Play resumes at: 15 seconds in.

Service ID (SID):17472
Transport Stream ID (TSID):16516
Originating Network ID (ONID):9018
Programme Map Table PID (PMTPID):100
Video PID:101
Audio PID:102
Bookmarks:0 =
</pre>

==Humidify==

A utility for manipulating Humax Download Format (HDF) files

==Inadyn==
A Dynamic DNS client with web configuration plugin (see webif settings page

==I-Phone Interface==

An iphone optimised web interface for the Humax

Screen Shots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==lsof==

This unix command stands for LiSt of Open Files,With no extentions it will default to 'All' open files, But it is probably more useful when used with a filter as shown in the examples :-

 lsof | grep humaxtv HIDE All files opened by the main Humax TV process

 lsof | cut -f 1 -d' ' | sort | uniq HIDE List all processes that have opened files

 lsof | grep epg HIDE All files opened by the EPG process

<pre>humax# lsof | grep epg
epg 596 root cwd 0000 31,0 1307722938 21474853357 /dev
epg 596 root rtd 0000 31,0 1321652395 77309428205 /
epg 596 root txt 0000 8,18 1322689164 4295000557 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9226050 /mnt/hd2/mod/bin/epg (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 174 /lib/ld-uClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 8,18 9225846 /mnt/hd2/mod/lib/libsqlite3.so.0.8.6 (path inode=4295000557)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 169 /lib/libuClibc-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 216 /lib/libpthread-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root mem REG 31,0 186 /lib/libdl-0.9.29.so (path inode=4295000448)
epg 596 root 0 0000 31,0 1307722935 4294975926 /dev/null
epg 596 root 1 0000 0,13 1322848876 4295000502 /tmp/epgd.log
epg 596 root 2 0000 0,13 1322848858 4295000502 /tmp/modinit.log
</pre>

==Jim==

Jim is a form of the programming language TCL (Tool Command Language), That runs on the Humax unix platform

==Mediatomb==
A free UPnP MediaServer. This package allows streaming of content from the Humax to other devices on your network, once that content has been decrypted

==Mongoose==

Mongoose is the Webserver that the Custom Firmware Package uses to present the Web pages you see when you log into the Web Interface, [[Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''SEE EXAMPLES''']]

==Network Shares Automount==

Automatic mounting of remote nfs or smb directories, with configuration on the box, using special "settings" directorys to add and configure shares. Remote host(s) are "pinged" regularly, and shares are mounting / unmounting automatically with host availability

Folders on a computer or NAS box can be shared with other devices on the same network. On the humax box with custom firmware we can add support for two protocols - smb (used by Windows, pre-Lion OsX, linux running Samba), and nfs (Linux, OsX, common with NAS boxes). smb support is provided by the cifs package. We can "mount" the remote shared folder(s) so they appear as if they were part of the local file system on the Humax

This packages uses directory names in the "*Modsettings/smb" and/or "*Modsettings/nfs" folders to configure as many shares as you like. For example to set up a new smb share, use the opt+ button to create a new directory within the smb folder. Name it what you want the mount to be called (eg "MyPc") Wait about 10 seconds, and navigate into the new folder. The script should have created a load of template "configuration directories" for you to rename (host IP address, foldername, user, password etc). Note that the "_" symbol is used instead of "." in IP names and "/" in folder names as these can't be input (or if they can I think the box changes them to a "_")

Once configured, the script will regularly ping the host computer to see if it is available. If it is then the shared folder will be mounted and should be browsable. If the host goes offline, the folder will be unmounted, preventing the box from locking up.

Wake up On LAN (WOL) is also available to automatically power up compatible (newer) NAS boxes, The user must supply the MAC address of the NAS box and set WakeUp=on

==NTFS 3g==

Read/write NTFS disk access. Out of the box the Humax can read NTFS formatted drives but this package upgrades that support to full read/write access

==Ntp Client==
Sets the Humax clock from an Internet time server on each boot. Useful if you do not have an aerial connection

==Remote Scheduling (RS)==

Remote Scheduling Service. Links your device to the remote scheduling portal so you can manage your scheduled recordings list from anywhere with an Internet connection and web browser

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling | '''HERE''']]

==Portal Foscam==

See [[Custom_TV_Portal#Portal_Foscam | '''GUIDE''']]

==Prog Backup==

Utility for backing up recordings and sidecar files to locally attached drives, A search of attatched drives will be made so that the user can choose. Both Hi-Def and Standard definition recordings will be de-crypted so they can be played on a P.C. or copied back to a different Humax. Command line examples Below :-

 progbackup HIDE Backup everthing under My Video

 progbackup "/mnt/hd2/My Video/BOB's Films/" HIDE Backup files in a specified folder

'''NOTE:-''' Make sure to use the quotation marks around the directory name.

==Remote Scheduling Auto==

Full Guide[[Remote_Scheduling_Auto | '''HERE''']]

==Samba==
Windows compatible file sharing. Allows access to the Humax filesystem from a computer on the same network. The file system is shared using Windows compatible sharing so can be access from Windows, MacOSX and most other operating systems

==Series Filer==

If a folder name exists at the top level and at a lower level, the contents of the top level folder are copied into the lower folder and the, now empty, top level folder is deleted

==Service Control==

A command line utility allowing easy control of installed services. Run the 'service' command from the command line for help.

From a Telnet command line prompt send the following :-

 service 
<pre>
humax# service

Name Installed Autostart Running
---- --------- --------- -------
mediatomb No No No
dropbear No No No
transmission No No No
samba No No No
cifs No No No
mongoose Yes Yes Yes

Syntax:
service start <service>
service stop <service>
service auto <service> (toggles autostart) </pre>

==SQLite==

SQlite is an SQL database engine that contains a 'C' software library

==SSMTP==

SSMTP is a program to deliver an E-mail from your Humax to a mailhost or mailhub, It will not handle incomming E-Mail

==Telnet==

Telnet is built into the default Custom Firmware package, To communicate Via Telnet from a P.C. you will need a program such as [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY], Select connection type Telnet and enter the IP address of your Humax into the Host Name box, Then select OPEN, You will be presented with a new Telnet Window and if connection is successful you will see the humax# prompt.

NOTES
*Telnet command lines on this WiKi are identified by a Yellow Background 
*Telnet >> Connection >> Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked'

==Transmission (Bit Torrent)==

A Bit-Torrent client for the Humax. This has a web interface which runs on port 8080 by default. Allows the Humax to download files from the Internet using the BitTorrent protocol

*Go into service control and start Transmission
*Set it to auto start if you want it to come on whenever the box is on
*Go to the Web-If main menu and click the transmission icon at the bottom left
*Select 'Open' (the folder at the top left)
*Select browse in the window (Upload Torrent Files) which opens and browse for the torrent
*When found highlight it then select 'Open'
*Select 'Upload'
*If the 'Start when added' box is checked the download will start immediately

==trm==

trm is a version of the Unix rm command (ReMove), This version removes files in blocks using Truncate (hence Truncate ReMove) rather than all at once, In order to reduce demand on system resources

==Unencrypt==

This function will unencrypt all files in a designated directory (or all files in My Video) automatically, Files are de-crypted at the same location e.g. 'decrypt in place' and are processed at the rate of one file every 30 Mins. max. so don't expect instant results

To setup Unencrypt install the package and then via Telnet enter one of the lines below :-

 unencryptsetup "Bob's Videos" HIDE process a single directory

 unencryptsetup HIDE process all files in 'My Video'

 unencryptsetup disable HIDE Turn off unencrypt

This will update the cron table and schedule the program to run every 30 minutes (at Mins 01 and 31) indefinitely. Every time it runs, it will check that there isn't already another job running and then decrypt the first encrypted file that it finds in the directory you specified, therefore gradually working its way through your files, If you don't specify a directory, it will default to decrypting all of your recordings.

NOTES:-
*Auto-Unprotect must be running
*Media sharing must = on
*Set-up Telnet as follows :- Putty Configuration >> Catagory = Telnet >> return Key sends Telnet New Line instead of ^M should be 'un-Ticked' (or if using Windows Telnet use "unset crlf" before opening the session)

==Undelete==

Redirects deleted recordings to a dustbin folder called [Deleted Items] and then automatically removes them from this new folder 7 days later, The Folder Name and delay before deletion is carried out (1 to 30 days) is configurable in the Web-If Setting area. It's a batch process which runs once per day. It runs 6 minutes after the first boot of the day or, if you keep your box on all the time, at 2am.
It scans the bin and removes anything that was put there over x * 24 hours ago, Where x = no. of days (strictly, anything that was last modified over x * 24 hours ago)

==Virtual-Disk==

One way to decrypt content which has been recorded by the Humax is to copy to an external disk, This is usually a slow process as the
external disk must be connected via one of the USB ports. This package creates a virtual disk on the system to which content can
be copied. It is much faster since it is based on the internal hard disk. The virtual disk is shared by the MediaTomb package by default, giving a
fairly straightforward method of sharing recorded content on the network. In conjunction with the 'auto-unprotect' package, high definition content can also be shared

==Web IF ==

[[Web_Interface_Screenshots |'''Screen Shots''']] HIDE [[Webif_release_notes |'''Release Notes''']]

An evolving web interface for the Humax. This package provides a means of accessing the Humax using a web browser on any device connected to the
network (including mobile 'phones and iPads). The interface allows easy viewing of recorded programme details as well as allowing basic
manipulation to be performed. Additionally the EPG can be viewed and searched from within the web browser

Within the Web-IF are the following Built-In Functions :-

===Clipboard===

Used in conjunction with Copy, Cut and Paste, The clipboard is an area that files can be temporarily held in while a new folder is selected. It emulates a Windows Clipboard

===Copy===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Crop===

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Crop

See Edit on Box link [[Edit_On_Box#Editing_Via_Web-If |'''HERE''']]

===Cut===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Decrypt===

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Decrypt

This Function will move the file an _original folder and then stream a new copy to the present location, The new copy will be Decrypted and can be played on a P.C.. NOTE both High Definition AND Standard definition need to be Decrypted

* '''De-duplicate / Tidy this folder'''
[[File:Webif-media-ded.png|70px|thumb|right]]
[[File:Webif-media-ded2.png|70px|thumb|right]]

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> De-duplicate / Tidy this folder

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles, It will also seperate duplicates into a new folder

See Tidy (Re-name) Example >>

This Function will search a folder and re-name files with more meaningful titles

It will Also seperate duplicates into a new folder

See De Duplicate (to new folder) Example >>

===Download===

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Download

This function will download with decrytion an SD file (or Hi-Def File if the 'ENC' flag is removed) and place it into the default download folder on your P.C., The following items may inhibit it functioning correctly :-

# The File type *.TS must not be assosiated with a program such as a media player, If it is, Remove the association
# Your brouser must allow re-direction of addresses

===Extract Audio===

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Extract Audio

This function will produce an MP3 file containing the stereo audio track contained in a standard Def. Video file (or radio recording), The following conditions must be met :-

#The file must be de-crypted (Dispays a DEC against it)
#ffmpeg package must be installed
#Standard Def. recording only (Hi-Def 2 Ch or 6 Ch sound won't be decoded)

===Paste===

See [[Custom_Firmware_Package_Notes#Clipboard | '''Clipboard''']]

===Remove Enc===

Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> (Select Single File) >> OPT+ >> Remove Enc

This Function will remove the ENC flag from High Definition content, The file remains encrypted (as does Standard Definition) until a sepearate decryption function is carried out

===Save Last Streamed Content===
Web-If MAIN >> BROWSE MEDIA FILES >> Save Last Streamed Content

This Function will make a permanent MP4 copy of and content that has been view using the Humax TV portal e.g. I-Player / You Tube, The Telnet Syntax is as follows :-

cp /mnt/hd3/Streamer_down_file "/media/My Video/theclip.mp4" 

==Webif-iphone==
A cut-down web interface, optimised for display on the iPhone and other mobile devices

See Screenshots [[Smartphone_Web_Interface_Screenshots | '''HERE''']]

==wget==

Retrieve files via HTTP or FTP

Note:- There is already a version of wget in Busybox which is loaded automatically, However it may be necessary to install the stand alone package as it will be a newer version

Glossary Of Terms

2011-08-17T16:47:58Z

Black Hole:

''Copied from Black Hole's [http://hummy.tv/forum/threads/faq-glossary-of-terms.403/ thread on hummy.tv] - note that (for the time being) the Forum version will be updated first.''

===BYTs===
''Bright Young Things'' - Fittingly at the top of the list (even though I've thought of something to explain starting with "A"), BYTs is the term I've coined for the fantastic bunch with the youth and energy to figure out the hacks that we are celebrating on this forum. Wind the clock back 20 or 30 years and it could have been me, but the brain now struggles to keep up. Don't worry, the rest of this glossary is serious!

===AR===
''Accurate Recording'' - See EPG.

===CRID, PRID, SRID===
''Content Reference IDentifier'' - The EPG provides unique reference codes to the programmes which are useful for machines to track the programmes (and potentially to retrieve additional information via the Internet). The Programme CRID (PRID - unofficial) identifies the programme individually and allows the Humax to ensure that repeats don't get recorded, the Series CRID (SRID - unofficial) allows it to identify programmes to be recorded by series link. The CRID codes can be seen on the Humax programme information screen (via the "i" button) by turning them on in the secret menu.

===DHCP===
''Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol'' - For your devices to co-exist on your home network, they each need a unique "address" so that data meant for a particular device gets there and not somewhere else. This is the IP (Internet Protocol) Address, and typically for a home network the addresses will be 192.168.0.x or 192.168.1.x (where x is 0-255). It is possible to allocate these addresses manually, but it is a chore and you have to make sure you choose a valid address and don't allocate the same address to more than one device. DHCP is an automatic system which lets the device request an address from a manager device - often the router in your broadband connection.

===DLNA===
''Digital Living Network Alliance'' - a set of standards which allow compatible devices to locate each other on the local Ethernet network, and access each other's content for streamed playback, without the user having to understand network configuration settings. If you want to use the Humax' media streaming capability to show it's content elsewhere (firmware update 1.02.20 onwards), you will need a DLNA client - possibly a program running on a PC, or another Humax box - although it is possible to use non-DLNA media players if you can work out the correct network reference. The advantage of using another Humax is that it can access the HiDef content too (most other solutions will only access StDef recordings - see DTCP). You can also use a DLNA server to provide content to the Humax, again either running on a PC or using a NAS box with built-in DLNA capability (many do these days). See also uPnP.

===DTCP===
''Digital Transmission Content Protection'' - a means of securing rights-restricted material transferred by any digital channel (in our case Ethernet). As a media server, the Humax protects HiDef recordings by DTCP, thus restricting your choice of clients to those which have paid the relevant licence fees (not unlike HDCP). Note that (by running the modified software) DTCP can be effectively switched off. See also HDCP.

===EPG===
''Electronic Programme Guide'' - Along with the broadcast stations on Freeview comes a data channel containing information about the upcoming programmes (on all channels) for the next 8 days. This information is collected and organised for display when you press the "Guide" button. The content is broadcast continuously cyclically, with the more important information (the current channel, today) repeated more often than less important (other channels, programmes later in the future) so that the whole download is complete in about 15-20 minutes. In addition to the programme guide is a status channel for the Now/Next display and programme change-over, so that (in theory) PVRs can start a recording automatically at the start of a programme, even if it has been delayed (or brought forward). This is known as AR (Accurate Recording), but doesn't always work because broadcasters are not always reliable in transmitting this information (some worse than others). See also CRID.

===Ext3===
This is a method for arranging data on a hard drive, used by Linux systems (including the Humax). Unlike FAT32, it can accommodate huge video files without being truncated. Unlike NTFS, the Humax can write to it. Unfortunately, Windows PCs can't access it without help in the form of a special driver. The Humax can format a drive up to 1TByte to Ext3 through its menus (which will wipe anything that's on the drive), but beware that the Humax format has compatibility issues with other Linux systems (and also possibly the Windows driver). If you are adding an external drive to the Humax that will be dedicated to the purpose - no problem, but if you might want to connect the drive to other systems and access the contents it would be as well to format it elsewhere. See also FAT32 and NTFS.

===FAQ===
''Frequently Asked Questions'' - the popular Internet abbreviation for the section of a web site that contains information which the authors are fed up with answering individually, or expect to be asked so they put it up as a pre-emptive measure. FAQ has since been adopted to mean any unchanging reference material.

===FAT / FAT32===
''File Allocation Table'' - This is a method for arranging data on a hard drive, the other main one from the PC point of view being NTFS. The original FAT was only suitable for small drives, but in those days drives were only small. FAT32 drives can be much bigger (2TByte), but something to be very aware of when playing with video is the file size limit: each individual file on a FAT32 drive can be no greater than 4GBytes in size (that's a couple of hours of StDef, but less than an hour of HiDef). A Windows PC can access a FAT32 drive no problem, so can Linux and the Humax - but if the Humax tries to write a file that is larger than 4GBytes to a FAT32 drive, the file will be truncated and the Humax won't tell you there has been an error. See also NTFS and Ext3.

===Foxy===
Recordings made by the Humax are encrypted on the drive using a code unique to each individual box. Directly accessing the recording files (eg by FTP) sees only the encrypted files, so any files extracted are only any use for backup purposes and must be replaced on that specific Humax to be decrypted for replay. Copying an StDef recording to USB using the Humax menus obligingly decrypts the file, but not so HiDef recordings - which remain encrypted to oblige the broadcasters. Foxy is a utility that runs on a Windows PC and is capable of clearing the Enc flag on a HiDef recording, and thus make it decryptable just like a StDef recording. See also .ts. Users of the modified software can clear the Enc flag automatically within the Humax, no need for Foxy.

===FTP===
''File Transfer Protocol'' - a simple (for computers) standard for two devices to communicate across a network for copying files about. Both ends have to understand FTP (and have it turned on) for it to work though! With FTP turned on in the menu settings, it is possible to access the Humax by FTP. Typically one runs an FTP client on the PC which then provides drag-and-drop file management.

===HD / HiDef===
''High Definition'' - I use HiDef to disambiguate from other meanings of HD: eg Hard Drive, or HD-FOX T2. By HiDef we mean the content recorded from the Freeview HD channels eg BBC HD, BBC1 HD etc.

===HD / HDD===
''Hard (Disc) Drive (for completeness)'' - computer disc drive, either bare for inclusion in a piece of equipment or housed in a case for connection by USB (external/portable hard drive).

===HDCP===
''High bandwidth Digital Content Protection'' - How do the big film companies publish HiDef Blu-ray video discs and stop them being instantly pirated? Well, there's not much chance of stopping determined pirates, but they can stop the ordinary public from making a copy to pass around the family (or a legitimate safety backup) by making sure the content never appears accessibly in the clear (code-speak for unencrypted). HDCP is enforced by licence - equipment makers have to sign up to it to be granted access to the technology, pay a lot for it, and they undertake not to let the datastream out. What it does is to negotiate the HDMI link. If the source is providing copy-protected material, it first negotiates with the destination that it requires a secure link (and only an HDCP-compliant device knows how to negotiate), the link is established, and then the video is sent until the link gets broken (and has to be re-negotiated). What is true of Blu-ray is also true of FreeviewHD - the broadcasters wish to keep control of it - so the Humax also negotiates a secure link with the TV. See also HDMI.

===HD-FOX T2===
The version of the Humax FreeviewHD tuner/PVR which does not include an internal hard drive and therefore only records to an external drive. "HD" for FreeviewHD, "T2" is the modulation scheme for broadcast digital HD used in the UK (not in common with most of the rest of the world). The HD-FOX T2 is also one tuner short of a full set (deficient in the tuner division to the leg of one).

===HDMI===
''High Definition Multimedia Interface'' - Unless you have a steam telly and are using the SCART interface, HDMI will be the type of connection you are using to send the video/sound to your TV (I still have a couple of tellies that don't even have SCART). In essence: SCART is an analogue interface, in other words the picture information is sent as continuous voltage levels; whereas HDMI is a digital interface and every single pixel on the screen is defined precisely by (typically) three bytes of data, 25 times a second. Add it up - that's a lot of data! SCART is okay for traditional 625-line pre-digital TV, but the analogue waveforms cannot keep up with the detail in HiDef video. The digital data in HDMI means that at each binary bit of every pixel, the transmission scheme only has to successfully communicate the difference between a "1" and a "0" - and even that is tricky at up to 340 million bits per second over a few metres of cheap cable. See also SCART, HDCP.

===HDR-FOX T2===
The version of the Humax FreeviewHD tuner/PVR which does include an internal hard drive. "HDR" for FreeviewHD Recorder, "T2" is the modulation scheme for broadcast digital HD used in the UK (not in common with most of the rest of the world).

===Humax / Hummy===
Abbreviated / jocular reference to a box made by Humax (the company). In this section of the Hummy.tv forum it would be natural to assume the author is referring to the HDR-FOX T2 unless otherwise stated. Much of the discussion here also applies to the HD-FOX T2, as indeed most of the discussion in the HD-FOX T2 section also applies here (I assume).

===.hdf===
''Humax Download Format (unsubstantiated)'' - Software updates for the Humax are distributed as .hdf files. If a USB memory stick is plugged into the Humax at boot-up, and it contains a .hdf file (precisely named "hdr_fox_t2_upgrade.hdf") in the top directory, the Humax will start a firmware/software update from the file (even if that version of software is already installed). The modified software is also distributed as .hdf files. Updating by downloading a .hdf to a USB stick is an alternative to the OTA (Over The Air) update service that happens automatically in areas able to receive FreeviewHD.

===NAS===
''Network-Attached Storage'' - an external hard disc drive accessed by an Ethernet connection instead of a USB cable. This means its content can be accessed by anything on the network, not just the PC it happens to be plugged into, and doesn't rely on the PC being turned on. Of course, if you have a USB drive plugged into the Humax and the Humax is on, you have a DLNA NAS (in addition to the drive already in the Humax).

===NTFS===
''New Technology File System'' - NT as in Windows NT, the basis of modern Windows (as opposed to the Win3.1 - Win98 - WinME product line). This is a method for arranging data on a hard drive, the other main one from the PC point of view being FAT32. NTFS does not suffer the file size limits of FAT32. A Windows PC can access a NTFS drive no problem, Linux can now but used to have trouble, but the Humax can only read from an NTFS drive - it can't write to it (although the modified software project may add that capability one day). See also FAT32 and Ext3.

===PRID===
''Programme Reference IDentifier'' - Unofficial, see CRID.

===PVR===
''Personal Video Recorder'' - Traditionally, a broadcast video recorder that records programmes to an internal memory/hard drive rather than a removeable disc (eg DVD-R) or tape cassette, therefore the recording is only available personally.

===Samba===
Windows PCs can share their drives over a network so that the PCs can access the files on a remote PC as if they were on the local PC. The Linux method for sharing drives (compatible with Windows shares) is Samba. With the modified software installed on the Humax, Samba can also be installed and that makes the files on the Humax directly accessible from Windows PCs across the network, just like a local file. This means that any media player compatible with the .ts file format (once decrypted) can play the file regardless of DLNA, and fast-forward/rewind will work.

===SCART===
''Radio and Television Receiver Manufacturers' Association (in French)'' - Basically the chunky 21-pin connector that was used to connect AV equipment before HDMI came along. The Humax simultaneously outputs video and audio digitally on the HDMI, and to conventional analogue TV standards on the SCART and the phono connectors (composite video plus stereo audio - query: is RGB available on the SCART?). If you have an analogue DVD recorder, the SCART is probably the quickest way to copy a programme from the Humax to disc - the alternatives being a time-consuming process of decrypting and copying the content to a PC, then converting the file format to suit a DVD and burning it. See also HDMI.

===SD / StDef===
''Standard Definition (see also HiDef)'' - By StDef we mean the content recorded from the Freeview non-HD channels.

===SRID===
''Series Reference IDentifier'' - Unofficial, see CRID.

===.ts===
''Transport Stream'' - this is the "file type" of a video file recorded on the Humax, and each recording comprises a set of four files (three in the case of a radio recording) - all with the same name but having different file types, the important one being the .ts. Pressing the "Media" button on the handset lists the file sets, but to see the individual files requires exploring the Humax drive by FTP. Note that the .ts files as recorded by the Humax are encrypted, and if copied by FTP they remain encrypted. Decrypting the files requires a copy to be performed by the Humax menus onto an external drive (or a virtual drive if using the modified software, network drives in the future), and in the case of HiDef .ts files only after first clearing the Enc flag in the recording's file set (see Foxy). Files are also decrypted on-the-fly when being streamed to a DLNA client.

===uPnP===
''Universal Plug-n-Play'' - A set of standards which provide the self-configuration we enjoy with our computer equipment these days. Remember when it used to be necessary to install and configure some kind of driver before anything would work at all? No?? You don't know you're born! These days, plug in a USB memory stick or a printer, chances are the operating system will think a little while and then the device is ready for use. USB uPnP standards are responsible for this, the hardware in the device is able to identify itself on request, then the operating system configures built-in drivers to deal with it. DLNA provides uPnP across a network, so for example a media streaming client is able to locate a server on the network without human intervention. See DLNA.

===USB===
''Universal Serial Bus'' - the (currently) ubiquitous socket for connecting peripherals to PCs, or in our case for connecting an external storage device (memory stick or portable hard drive) to the Humax. The HDR-FOX T2 has two USB sockets: one on the front under a flap, and one on the rear immediately below the Ethernet socket.